+ All Categories
Home > Documents > vlsi manual

vlsi manual

Date post: 30-Oct-2014
Category:
Upload: kristin-farrell
View: 142 times
Download: 2 times
Share this document with a friend
Description:
vlsi manual....
Popular Tags:
52
VLSI Lab Manual (Session: Jan – May 2012) LIST OF EXPERIMENTS Cycle I 1. Design Inverter using FETs. 2. Design two input NAND and NOR. 3. Design XOR and XNOR. 4. Design AND and OR using instantiation. Cycle II 5. Realization of Boolean expressions. 6. Design D, T, JK and Master Slave flip- flops. 7. Implement serial and 2 bit parallel adders. 8. Implement 4 to 1 Multiplexer. Cycle III 9. Implement shift register capable of holding and shifting 4 bit words. 10. Design asynchronous and synchronous 4 bit counters. 11. Design of 6T SRAM cell with 4-bit line and Word line control. 12. Design and implement 4 X 4 barrel shifter. Faculty Incharge: Mrs. Rekha S S Page 1/ 52 Mr. Ravikant G B
Transcript
Page 1: vlsi manual

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

Cycle I

1 Design Inverter using FETs

2 Design two input NAND and NOR

3 Design XOR and XNOR

4 Design AND and OR using instantiation

Cycle II

5 Realization of Boolean expressions

6 Design D T JK and Master Slave flip-flops

7 Implement serial and 2 bit parallel adders

8 Implement 4 to 1 Multiplexer

Cycle III

9 Implement shift register capable of holding and shifting 4 bit words

10 Design asynchronous and synchronous 4 bit counters

11 Design of 6T SRAM cell with 4-bit line and Word line control

12 Design and implement 4 X 4 barrel shifter

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 1 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 1

AIM Draw a circuit for inverter for specified length and width using schematic and for the same draw the layout

a) For the above verify the timing diagrams in both schematic and layoutb) Plot voltage vs time and VTC (Voltage transfer characteristics)c) Perform LVS for the same

THEORY The digital Logic NOT Gate is the most basic of all the logical gates and is sometimes referred to as an Inverting Buffer or simply a Digital Inverter It is a single input device which has an output level that is normally at logic level 1 and goes LOW to a logic level 0 when its single input is at logic level 1 in other words it inverts (complements) its input signal The output from a NOT gate only returns HIGH again when its input is at logic level 0 giving us the Boolean expression of A = QThen we can define the operation of a single input logic NOT gate as being

If Input is NOT true then Output is trueThe Digital Inverter or NOT gate

Symbol Truth Table

A Q

0 1

1 0

Boolean Expression Q = not A or A Read as inverse of A gives Q

PROCEDURE

S-EDIT1) Click on S-EDIT icon on desktop2) From File click on NEW and open the new design

i New design - name the design 3) Select Cell from the tool bar

-gtNew view -gt Give the cell name and select view type as schematic4) Go to Library window and click on ADD button to select library

Path to select the library --- my doc tanner EDA Tanner tool Libraries all5) In the library window

i select devices to select nMOS pMOS etc select the required component and drag amp drop in the cell

ii Select Misc to select Vdd and Gnd ( drag and drop)6) Ctrl R is used to rotate the components 7) Build circuit ( using wire icon from the tool bar to make the connections and input port and

output port to make the input and output connections)8) Check the schematic for any errors ( click on the double tick icon on the tool bar)

i If any errors or warnings it will display (correct both errors and warnings)9) Click on Open in T-spice from the tool bar

NOTE Alt + left mouse button will help to drag any component after selecting it

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 2 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

S-EDIT FILE

T-SPICE (AFTER SCHEMATIC)1) Open T-SPICE file from schematic window toolbar and save it in the desired location(do save

as )2) On toolbar of the T-SPICE click on INSERT COMMAND prompt3) Keep the cursor where the arrow marks

shown of the T-SPCIE window and Select

FILES-gtLibrary fileBrowse for the technology file (path my doc Tanner EDA tanner toollibraries models generic_025lib)and Type TT in the Library --- gt Click on insert button

Voltage Source-gtConstant -gtVoltage Source name V1

-gtPositive terminal Vdd -gtNegetive terminal Gnd -gtDC value 5

To initialize the input Voltage source name v2 Positive terminal wirte the port name what you have given in

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 3 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

the schematic diagram Negetive terminal Gnd DC value 5 input can be bit stream or pulse

Then click on insert button

Analysis in this select Transient

maximum step size 10n simulation length 100n start time 0n(Note above values can vary subject to design)Then click on insert button

DC analysis DC transfer sweep sweep type linear parameter type source parameter name name the voltage source of the input start voltage 0 and Stop voltage 5Increment 01( as your wish) Then click on acceptNext click on insert button

Output click on transient result if the analysis is transient click on DC results is the analysis is DC analysis enter the node name of both input and output ( which waveforms you have to observer that particulars node names should be entered)

click on insert buttonSAVE

4) Select the RUN simulation option from the toolbar (Click on the green arrow )5) Verify the waveforms

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 4 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

T-SPICE FILE (AFTER inserting the commands ndash netlist of the schematic)For Transient Analysis and DC Analysis

W-EDIT WAVEFORM (S) after clicking the simulation button in the T-SPICE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 5 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

L-EDIT

1) Open L-EDIT icon on desktop2) Select FILE from toolbar and go to New File3) Browse and add TDB setup file Generic_025tdb ( my doc tanner EDA tanner toolsLVS and L-

edit techgeneric_0254) Go to Cell in the tool bar Select instance browse for T-Cells ( path my doc tanner EDA T-

Cells or my doc T-Cells ) and select instantiate p and n transistors from T-cell library (TC_NMOS and TC_PMOS)Keep the L and W values of transistors same as in s-edit

5) Complete the layout connections and Select lsquoArsquo (port) option from toolbar to NAME all the ports as per the schematic circuit design

6) Click on the layer you want to name7) Select the ON LAYER and enter its PORT NAME8) SAVE the file in the form - ltfilename_ltdbgt9) Perform Design rule check and if any errors correct all the errors10) Click on Setup Extract

-gtCheck on (check book ) extract standard rule set- click on the pencilpen icon browse the path for extract file ( my doc tanner eda tanner tools LVS and L-edit tech

generic_025ugenericext give the output location where you want to save ( T-SPICE of the Layout )

11) Select EXTRACT from the toolbar12) Next open the T-SPICE file where you have save and repeat all the steps the 2 to 6 of the T-

SPICE ( what you did after the schematic) LAYOUT

T-SPICE FILE (netlist of the layout )

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 6 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

W-EDIT WAVEFORM (S) AFTER LAYOUT

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 7 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

LVS

1)Open LVS from the desktop2)Go to New-gtLVS Setup-gtAdd layout and schematic netlist which are spice files3)Perform Run Verification4)Check for the schematic and layout equality

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 8 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 2AIM Draw the circuits for nand and nor for specified length and width using schematic and for the same draw the layout

a) For the above verify the timing diagrams in both schematic and layoutb) Perform LVS for the same

S-EDIT PROCEDURE

T-SPICE FILE

W-EDIT FILE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 9 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

L-Edit Procedure1) Construct the layout as shown below

2)Set up extraction and extract the spice output3)Add all the required simulation commands and check for the waveforms These waveforms should match the Schematic waveforms4) Perform the LVS to check whether schematic and layouts are same Similarly perform an experiment for NOR functionality as well

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 10 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

SchematicLayout

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 11 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 3AIM Draw the circuits for XOR and XNOR for specified length and width using schematic and for the same draw the layout

a) For the above verify the timing diagrams in both schematic and layoutb) Plot voltage vs time and input voltage vs output voltagec) Perform the LVS to check circuit and layout equality

Theory XOR Gate The exclusive-OR (XOR) operator uses the symbol and it performs the following logic oplusoperation X oplus Y = X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y The graphic symbol and truth table of XOR gate is shown in the figure

The result is 1 only when either X is equal to 1 or Y is equal to 1 but not when both X and Y are equal to 1

XNOR Gate The exclusive-NOR (XNOR) operator uses the symbol 1048703 and it performs the following logic operation X 10487031048703Y = X Y + Xrsquo Yrsquo = (X oplus Y)rsquo The graphic symbol and truth table of XNOR (Equivalence) gate is shown in the figure

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 12 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

The result is 1 when either both X and Y are 0rsquos or when both are 1rsquos That is why this gate is often referred to as the Equivalence gate The truth tables clearly show that the exclusive-NOR operation is the complement of the exclusive-OR This can also be shown by algebraic manipulation as follows (X Y)rsquo = (X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y)rsquo oplus

= (X Yrsquo)rsquo (Xrsquo Y)rsquo = (Xrsquo + Y) (X + Yrsquo) = (XY + XrsquoYrsquo)

= X 10487031048703Y

The XOR gate can be constructed using MOSFETS as shown below

Schematic

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 13 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

T-Spice

Layout

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 14 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Spice Net list(Layout)

Waveforms

Perform the LVS for both schematic and layout

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 15 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Similarly perform an experiment for XNOR functionality as wellSchematic

Net List

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 16 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Layout

Simulations

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 17 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 4AIM Draw the circuits for AND gate and OR gate for specified length and width using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same draw the layout

a) For the above verify the timing diagrams in both schematic and layoutb) Plot voltage vs time and input voltage vs output voltagec) Perform the LVS to check circuit and layout equality

Procedure

And Gate1)Construct NAND gate and Inverter using the procedure mentioned before in s-edit using

MOSFETs2)Create a symbol for Nand and Inverter with the procedure below

Creating a Symbol 1)Construct a Nand Gate with MOSFETs as shown below2)Go to Cell in the tool bar and click on Update Symbol The symbol will be created Check for itrsquos

functionality in T-spice and save the s-edit project

3)Similarly construct the Inverter and update the symbol Check itrsquos functionality in T-spice and save the s-edit project

4)Open a new project to construct and gate Go to Add in the library Browser and add Nand and Inverter files which were constructed as shown below

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 18 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

5)Construct the And circuit with the symbols of Nand and inverter as shown below

6)Check the functionality in T-spice

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 19 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Waveforms in W-Edit

L-Edit

Note Add one inverter to the output of Nand gate Use poly contact while joining poly and metal

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 20 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

7)Similarly Construct Or gate using component instantiation in s-edit Verify itrsquos functionality using T-spiceBuild the layout by adding inverter to the output of the NOR gate

8)Perform the LVS for schematic and layout in both And gate as well as in Or gate to check the circuit equality in schematic and layout

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 21 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 5AIM Simplify the given expression and implement using the Universal (NAND) Logic Gates Use automatic place and Route for the layout

Ex 1) Y = ABrsquoCrsquo+ArsquoBrsquoCrsquo+ArsquoBCrsquo+ArsquoBrsquoC Simplify thisThis can be reduced to ArsquoBrsquo+BrsquoCrsquo+CrsquoArsquo

Procedure1 Construct the schematic for the above equation using only universal gates (Nand)2 Before implementing in schematic check the cell name and the port names of the logic

gates to be used in the circuit3 Steps for the (2)

a Open the L-Editor File-gtNew-gtbrowse for morbn20dtdb file(MyDocumentsmorbn20dmorbn20dtdb)

b Go to Cell-gtInstance-gtbrowse for morbn20d file (same path as above)Now go through the list of the library components Click the required cell and instantiate in the L-Editor From that instance note down the input and output port names And also note the cell name in the list

4 In schematic Editor ( this steps are only for the logic gates(ex Only for one nand gate)a File-gtNew Design-gtDesign Nameb Cell-gtNew Cell-gtcell name(same as the cell name in L-Editor library)c Draw the schematic and give the input and output names same as(3b)d Update the symbol Cell-gtUpdate symbole Go to properties window click on property icon(View-gtproperties)

and add the properties as shown in the below window

5 Implement the given expression in a New design instantiating the cell created in step (4) in S-Editor

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 22 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

6 Once the circuit is completed check for errors and simulation Export the design by using following stepsFiles-gtExport-gtExport TPR-gt Give the path (your design folder) to save the exported file in tpr format and click on Export

7 Go to L-Edit open New Design File-gtNew-gtbrowse for morbn20dtdb file(MyDocumentsmorbn20dmorbn20dtdb)

8 Click on Tools (from toolbar) -gt SPR -gt Place and Route9 A window will pop up Uncheck the last two options(Pad setup) Then click on Setup

from the same window Here browse for the technology file(morban20dext) and browse the path of the net list file ( tpr file path saved in step(6) ) Click on OK and then click on Run button

10 Layout will be generated automatically in the layout window for the designed circuit

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 23 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Example of the tpr file

C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_1 A A N_1C Nand3 A B C OutUNand3_1 N_6 N_5 N_4 OutC Nand2 A B OutUNand2_2 B B N_2C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_3 C C N_3C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_4 N_2 N_1 N_4C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_5 N_3 N_2 N_5C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_6 N_1 N_3 N_6

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 24 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 6AIM Draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor for

a) J K Flip flopb) J K Master Slave Flip flopc) D Flip flopd) T Flip flop

Verify the timing diagrams in schematic and generate the layout for the same using Place and route

Procedure

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 25 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Follow the same procedure given in the Experiment 5

Layout generated layout for the MSJKFF

Similarly implement for the DFF and TFF

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 26 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 7

AIM Design Serial and paralle adder and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

Circuit Diagram

ProcedureSame as in experiment 5

S-EDIT FILE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 27 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Generated Layout for the above circuit

Note Similar procedure is followed for the construction of parallel AdderThe schematic of parallel adder is as given below

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 28 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 8AIM Design 41 Mux and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematicImplement using universal gatesProcedureFollow the steps as in experiment 5S-Edit

Generated layout for the above circuit

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 29 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 9AIM Design of Asynchronous Synchronous Up-Down counters with minimum number of gates and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

DESIGN OF SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER

TRUTH TABLEQ3 Q2 Q1 Q0 Q3

+ Q2+ Q1

+ Q0+

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 1 0 0 1 00 0 1 0 0 0 1 10 0 1 1 0 1 0 00 1 0 0 0 1 0 10 1 0 1 0 1 1 00 1 1 0 0 1 1 10 1 1 1 1 0 0 01 0 0 0 1 0 0 11 0 0 1 1 0 1 01 0 1 0 1 0 1 11 0 1 1 1 1 0 01 1 0 0 1 1 0 11 1 0 1 1 1 1 01 1 1 0 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

Now using the karnaugh map we find the simplified expressions for Q3+ Q2

+ Q1+ Q0

+

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 30 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

PROCEDURE

1) In the first step for building the circuit for a synchronous counter design a D-FF using NAND2 NAND3 gates as shown below using component instantiation (create the cell name and port name same as in the morbon20(in L-edit))

2) Update the symbol

3) Add the DFF cell(symbol) in the library Instantiate DFF to build the Asynchronous counter Same way build the circuit for Synchronous counter along with required gates as per the above design

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 31 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Asynchronous Counter

Synchronous Counter

4) Check the working of the both COUNTERs and verify the truth table as per the usual procedure of T-SPICE and W-EDIT

W-EDIT FILE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 32 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

5) Export the schematic and generate the layout by TPR

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 33 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 10

AIM Design SERIAL REGISTER capable of holding and shifting 4 bit words and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

Circuit

A Simple Shift Register Consisting of D-type Flip-flops

PROCEDURE

1) Use the same DFF used in counters

2) Circuit diagram

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 34 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

3) Export the schematic and generate the layout by TPR

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 35 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 12

AIM Design a barrel shifter using nMOSFETs and draw the schematic in schematic editor Verify the timing diagrams in schematic for shift right operation

TheoryA barrel shifter is a digital circuit that can shift a data word by a specified number of bits in one clock cycle It can be implemented as a sequence of multiplexers (mux) and in such an implementation the output of one mux is connected to the input of the next mux in a way that depends on the shift distance

For example take a 4-bit barrel shifter with inputs A B C and D The shifter can cycle the order of the bits ABCD as DABC CDAB or BCDA in this case no bits are lost That is it can shift all of the outputs up to three positions to the right (and thus make any cyclic combination of A B C and D) The barrel shifter has a variety of applications including being a vital component in microprocessors (alongside the ALU)

A common usage of a barrel shifter is in the hardware implementation of floating-point arithmetic For a floating-point add or subtract operation the significant of the two numbers must be aligned which requires shifting the smaller number to the right increasing its exponent until it matches the exponent of the larger number This is done by subtracting the exponents and using the barrel shifter to shift the smaller number to the right by the difference in one cycle If a simple shifter were used shifting by n bit positions would require n clock cycles

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 36 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 37 37 Mr Ravikant G B

  • The Digital Inverter or NOT gate
  • PROCEDURE
  • XOR Gate
  • The exclusive-OR (XOR) operator uses the symbol oplus and it performs the following logic operation
  • X oplus Y = X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y
  • The result is 1 only when either X is equal to 1 or Y is equal to 1 but not when both X and Y are equal to 1
  • XNOR Gate
  • The exclusive-NOR (XNOR) operator uses the symbol 1048703 and it performs the following logic operation
  • X 1048703Y = X Y + Xrsquo Yrsquo = (X oplus Y)rsquo
  • The result is 1 when either both X and Y are 0rsquos or when both are 1rsquos That is why this gate is often referred to as the Equivalence gate
  • The truth tables clearly show that the exclusive-NOR operation is the complement of the exclusive-OR
  • This can also be shown by algebraic manipulation as follows
  • (X oplus Y)rsquo = (X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y)rsquo
  • = (X Yrsquo)rsquo (Xrsquo Y)rsquo = (Xrsquo + Y) (X + Yrsquo)
  • = (XY + XrsquoYrsquo)
Page 2: vlsi manual

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 1

AIM Draw a circuit for inverter for specified length and width using schematic and for the same draw the layout

a) For the above verify the timing diagrams in both schematic and layoutb) Plot voltage vs time and VTC (Voltage transfer characteristics)c) Perform LVS for the same

THEORY The digital Logic NOT Gate is the most basic of all the logical gates and is sometimes referred to as an Inverting Buffer or simply a Digital Inverter It is a single input device which has an output level that is normally at logic level 1 and goes LOW to a logic level 0 when its single input is at logic level 1 in other words it inverts (complements) its input signal The output from a NOT gate only returns HIGH again when its input is at logic level 0 giving us the Boolean expression of A = QThen we can define the operation of a single input logic NOT gate as being

If Input is NOT true then Output is trueThe Digital Inverter or NOT gate

Symbol Truth Table

A Q

0 1

1 0

Boolean Expression Q = not A or A Read as inverse of A gives Q

PROCEDURE

S-EDIT1) Click on S-EDIT icon on desktop2) From File click on NEW and open the new design

i New design - name the design 3) Select Cell from the tool bar

-gtNew view -gt Give the cell name and select view type as schematic4) Go to Library window and click on ADD button to select library

Path to select the library --- my doc tanner EDA Tanner tool Libraries all5) In the library window

i select devices to select nMOS pMOS etc select the required component and drag amp drop in the cell

ii Select Misc to select Vdd and Gnd ( drag and drop)6) Ctrl R is used to rotate the components 7) Build circuit ( using wire icon from the tool bar to make the connections and input port and

output port to make the input and output connections)8) Check the schematic for any errors ( click on the double tick icon on the tool bar)

i If any errors or warnings it will display (correct both errors and warnings)9) Click on Open in T-spice from the tool bar

NOTE Alt + left mouse button will help to drag any component after selecting it

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 2 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

S-EDIT FILE

T-SPICE (AFTER SCHEMATIC)1) Open T-SPICE file from schematic window toolbar and save it in the desired location(do save

as )2) On toolbar of the T-SPICE click on INSERT COMMAND prompt3) Keep the cursor where the arrow marks

shown of the T-SPCIE window and Select

FILES-gtLibrary fileBrowse for the technology file (path my doc Tanner EDA tanner toollibraries models generic_025lib)and Type TT in the Library --- gt Click on insert button

Voltage Source-gtConstant -gtVoltage Source name V1

-gtPositive terminal Vdd -gtNegetive terminal Gnd -gtDC value 5

To initialize the input Voltage source name v2 Positive terminal wirte the port name what you have given in

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 3 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

the schematic diagram Negetive terminal Gnd DC value 5 input can be bit stream or pulse

Then click on insert button

Analysis in this select Transient

maximum step size 10n simulation length 100n start time 0n(Note above values can vary subject to design)Then click on insert button

DC analysis DC transfer sweep sweep type linear parameter type source parameter name name the voltage source of the input start voltage 0 and Stop voltage 5Increment 01( as your wish) Then click on acceptNext click on insert button

Output click on transient result if the analysis is transient click on DC results is the analysis is DC analysis enter the node name of both input and output ( which waveforms you have to observer that particulars node names should be entered)

click on insert buttonSAVE

4) Select the RUN simulation option from the toolbar (Click on the green arrow )5) Verify the waveforms

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 4 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

T-SPICE FILE (AFTER inserting the commands ndash netlist of the schematic)For Transient Analysis and DC Analysis

W-EDIT WAVEFORM (S) after clicking the simulation button in the T-SPICE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 5 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

L-EDIT

1) Open L-EDIT icon on desktop2) Select FILE from toolbar and go to New File3) Browse and add TDB setup file Generic_025tdb ( my doc tanner EDA tanner toolsLVS and L-

edit techgeneric_0254) Go to Cell in the tool bar Select instance browse for T-Cells ( path my doc tanner EDA T-

Cells or my doc T-Cells ) and select instantiate p and n transistors from T-cell library (TC_NMOS and TC_PMOS)Keep the L and W values of transistors same as in s-edit

5) Complete the layout connections and Select lsquoArsquo (port) option from toolbar to NAME all the ports as per the schematic circuit design

6) Click on the layer you want to name7) Select the ON LAYER and enter its PORT NAME8) SAVE the file in the form - ltfilename_ltdbgt9) Perform Design rule check and if any errors correct all the errors10) Click on Setup Extract

-gtCheck on (check book ) extract standard rule set- click on the pencilpen icon browse the path for extract file ( my doc tanner eda tanner tools LVS and L-edit tech

generic_025ugenericext give the output location where you want to save ( T-SPICE of the Layout )

11) Select EXTRACT from the toolbar12) Next open the T-SPICE file where you have save and repeat all the steps the 2 to 6 of the T-

SPICE ( what you did after the schematic) LAYOUT

T-SPICE FILE (netlist of the layout )

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 6 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

W-EDIT WAVEFORM (S) AFTER LAYOUT

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 7 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

LVS

1)Open LVS from the desktop2)Go to New-gtLVS Setup-gtAdd layout and schematic netlist which are spice files3)Perform Run Verification4)Check for the schematic and layout equality

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 8 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 2AIM Draw the circuits for nand and nor for specified length and width using schematic and for the same draw the layout

a) For the above verify the timing diagrams in both schematic and layoutb) Perform LVS for the same

S-EDIT PROCEDURE

T-SPICE FILE

W-EDIT FILE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 9 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

L-Edit Procedure1) Construct the layout as shown below

2)Set up extraction and extract the spice output3)Add all the required simulation commands and check for the waveforms These waveforms should match the Schematic waveforms4) Perform the LVS to check whether schematic and layouts are same Similarly perform an experiment for NOR functionality as well

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 10 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

SchematicLayout

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 11 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 3AIM Draw the circuits for XOR and XNOR for specified length and width using schematic and for the same draw the layout

a) For the above verify the timing diagrams in both schematic and layoutb) Plot voltage vs time and input voltage vs output voltagec) Perform the LVS to check circuit and layout equality

Theory XOR Gate The exclusive-OR (XOR) operator uses the symbol and it performs the following logic oplusoperation X oplus Y = X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y The graphic symbol and truth table of XOR gate is shown in the figure

The result is 1 only when either X is equal to 1 or Y is equal to 1 but not when both X and Y are equal to 1

XNOR Gate The exclusive-NOR (XNOR) operator uses the symbol 1048703 and it performs the following logic operation X 10487031048703Y = X Y + Xrsquo Yrsquo = (X oplus Y)rsquo The graphic symbol and truth table of XNOR (Equivalence) gate is shown in the figure

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 12 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

The result is 1 when either both X and Y are 0rsquos or when both are 1rsquos That is why this gate is often referred to as the Equivalence gate The truth tables clearly show that the exclusive-NOR operation is the complement of the exclusive-OR This can also be shown by algebraic manipulation as follows (X Y)rsquo = (X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y)rsquo oplus

= (X Yrsquo)rsquo (Xrsquo Y)rsquo = (Xrsquo + Y) (X + Yrsquo) = (XY + XrsquoYrsquo)

= X 10487031048703Y

The XOR gate can be constructed using MOSFETS as shown below

Schematic

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 13 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

T-Spice

Layout

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 14 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Spice Net list(Layout)

Waveforms

Perform the LVS for both schematic and layout

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 15 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Similarly perform an experiment for XNOR functionality as wellSchematic

Net List

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 16 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Layout

Simulations

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 17 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 4AIM Draw the circuits for AND gate and OR gate for specified length and width using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same draw the layout

a) For the above verify the timing diagrams in both schematic and layoutb) Plot voltage vs time and input voltage vs output voltagec) Perform the LVS to check circuit and layout equality

Procedure

And Gate1)Construct NAND gate and Inverter using the procedure mentioned before in s-edit using

MOSFETs2)Create a symbol for Nand and Inverter with the procedure below

Creating a Symbol 1)Construct a Nand Gate with MOSFETs as shown below2)Go to Cell in the tool bar and click on Update Symbol The symbol will be created Check for itrsquos

functionality in T-spice and save the s-edit project

3)Similarly construct the Inverter and update the symbol Check itrsquos functionality in T-spice and save the s-edit project

4)Open a new project to construct and gate Go to Add in the library Browser and add Nand and Inverter files which were constructed as shown below

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 18 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

5)Construct the And circuit with the symbols of Nand and inverter as shown below

6)Check the functionality in T-spice

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 19 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Waveforms in W-Edit

L-Edit

Note Add one inverter to the output of Nand gate Use poly contact while joining poly and metal

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 20 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

7)Similarly Construct Or gate using component instantiation in s-edit Verify itrsquos functionality using T-spiceBuild the layout by adding inverter to the output of the NOR gate

8)Perform the LVS for schematic and layout in both And gate as well as in Or gate to check the circuit equality in schematic and layout

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 21 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 5AIM Simplify the given expression and implement using the Universal (NAND) Logic Gates Use automatic place and Route for the layout

Ex 1) Y = ABrsquoCrsquo+ArsquoBrsquoCrsquo+ArsquoBCrsquo+ArsquoBrsquoC Simplify thisThis can be reduced to ArsquoBrsquo+BrsquoCrsquo+CrsquoArsquo

Procedure1 Construct the schematic for the above equation using only universal gates (Nand)2 Before implementing in schematic check the cell name and the port names of the logic

gates to be used in the circuit3 Steps for the (2)

a Open the L-Editor File-gtNew-gtbrowse for morbn20dtdb file(MyDocumentsmorbn20dmorbn20dtdb)

b Go to Cell-gtInstance-gtbrowse for morbn20d file (same path as above)Now go through the list of the library components Click the required cell and instantiate in the L-Editor From that instance note down the input and output port names And also note the cell name in the list

4 In schematic Editor ( this steps are only for the logic gates(ex Only for one nand gate)a File-gtNew Design-gtDesign Nameb Cell-gtNew Cell-gtcell name(same as the cell name in L-Editor library)c Draw the schematic and give the input and output names same as(3b)d Update the symbol Cell-gtUpdate symbole Go to properties window click on property icon(View-gtproperties)

and add the properties as shown in the below window

5 Implement the given expression in a New design instantiating the cell created in step (4) in S-Editor

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 22 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

6 Once the circuit is completed check for errors and simulation Export the design by using following stepsFiles-gtExport-gtExport TPR-gt Give the path (your design folder) to save the exported file in tpr format and click on Export

7 Go to L-Edit open New Design File-gtNew-gtbrowse for morbn20dtdb file(MyDocumentsmorbn20dmorbn20dtdb)

8 Click on Tools (from toolbar) -gt SPR -gt Place and Route9 A window will pop up Uncheck the last two options(Pad setup) Then click on Setup

from the same window Here browse for the technology file(morban20dext) and browse the path of the net list file ( tpr file path saved in step(6) ) Click on OK and then click on Run button

10 Layout will be generated automatically in the layout window for the designed circuit

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 23 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Example of the tpr file

C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_1 A A N_1C Nand3 A B C OutUNand3_1 N_6 N_5 N_4 OutC Nand2 A B OutUNand2_2 B B N_2C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_3 C C N_3C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_4 N_2 N_1 N_4C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_5 N_3 N_2 N_5C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_6 N_1 N_3 N_6

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 24 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 6AIM Draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor for

a) J K Flip flopb) J K Master Slave Flip flopc) D Flip flopd) T Flip flop

Verify the timing diagrams in schematic and generate the layout for the same using Place and route

Procedure

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 25 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Follow the same procedure given in the Experiment 5

Layout generated layout for the MSJKFF

Similarly implement for the DFF and TFF

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 26 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 7

AIM Design Serial and paralle adder and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

Circuit Diagram

ProcedureSame as in experiment 5

S-EDIT FILE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 27 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Generated Layout for the above circuit

Note Similar procedure is followed for the construction of parallel AdderThe schematic of parallel adder is as given below

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 28 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 8AIM Design 41 Mux and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematicImplement using universal gatesProcedureFollow the steps as in experiment 5S-Edit

Generated layout for the above circuit

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 29 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 9AIM Design of Asynchronous Synchronous Up-Down counters with minimum number of gates and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

DESIGN OF SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER

TRUTH TABLEQ3 Q2 Q1 Q0 Q3

+ Q2+ Q1

+ Q0+

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 1 0 0 1 00 0 1 0 0 0 1 10 0 1 1 0 1 0 00 1 0 0 0 1 0 10 1 0 1 0 1 1 00 1 1 0 0 1 1 10 1 1 1 1 0 0 01 0 0 0 1 0 0 11 0 0 1 1 0 1 01 0 1 0 1 0 1 11 0 1 1 1 1 0 01 1 0 0 1 1 0 11 1 0 1 1 1 1 01 1 1 0 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

Now using the karnaugh map we find the simplified expressions for Q3+ Q2

+ Q1+ Q0

+

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 30 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

PROCEDURE

1) In the first step for building the circuit for a synchronous counter design a D-FF using NAND2 NAND3 gates as shown below using component instantiation (create the cell name and port name same as in the morbon20(in L-edit))

2) Update the symbol

3) Add the DFF cell(symbol) in the library Instantiate DFF to build the Asynchronous counter Same way build the circuit for Synchronous counter along with required gates as per the above design

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 31 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Asynchronous Counter

Synchronous Counter

4) Check the working of the both COUNTERs and verify the truth table as per the usual procedure of T-SPICE and W-EDIT

W-EDIT FILE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 32 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

5) Export the schematic and generate the layout by TPR

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 33 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 10

AIM Design SERIAL REGISTER capable of holding and shifting 4 bit words and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

Circuit

A Simple Shift Register Consisting of D-type Flip-flops

PROCEDURE

1) Use the same DFF used in counters

2) Circuit diagram

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 34 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

3) Export the schematic and generate the layout by TPR

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 35 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 12

AIM Design a barrel shifter using nMOSFETs and draw the schematic in schematic editor Verify the timing diagrams in schematic for shift right operation

TheoryA barrel shifter is a digital circuit that can shift a data word by a specified number of bits in one clock cycle It can be implemented as a sequence of multiplexers (mux) and in such an implementation the output of one mux is connected to the input of the next mux in a way that depends on the shift distance

For example take a 4-bit barrel shifter with inputs A B C and D The shifter can cycle the order of the bits ABCD as DABC CDAB or BCDA in this case no bits are lost That is it can shift all of the outputs up to three positions to the right (and thus make any cyclic combination of A B C and D) The barrel shifter has a variety of applications including being a vital component in microprocessors (alongside the ALU)

A common usage of a barrel shifter is in the hardware implementation of floating-point arithmetic For a floating-point add or subtract operation the significant of the two numbers must be aligned which requires shifting the smaller number to the right increasing its exponent until it matches the exponent of the larger number This is done by subtracting the exponents and using the barrel shifter to shift the smaller number to the right by the difference in one cycle If a simple shifter were used shifting by n bit positions would require n clock cycles

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 36 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 37 37 Mr Ravikant G B

  • The Digital Inverter or NOT gate
  • PROCEDURE
  • XOR Gate
  • The exclusive-OR (XOR) operator uses the symbol oplus and it performs the following logic operation
  • X oplus Y = X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y
  • The result is 1 only when either X is equal to 1 or Y is equal to 1 but not when both X and Y are equal to 1
  • XNOR Gate
  • The exclusive-NOR (XNOR) operator uses the symbol 1048703 and it performs the following logic operation
  • X 1048703Y = X Y + Xrsquo Yrsquo = (X oplus Y)rsquo
  • The result is 1 when either both X and Y are 0rsquos or when both are 1rsquos That is why this gate is often referred to as the Equivalence gate
  • The truth tables clearly show that the exclusive-NOR operation is the complement of the exclusive-OR
  • This can also be shown by algebraic manipulation as follows
  • (X oplus Y)rsquo = (X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y)rsquo
  • = (X Yrsquo)rsquo (Xrsquo Y)rsquo = (Xrsquo + Y) (X + Yrsquo)
  • = (XY + XrsquoYrsquo)
Page 3: vlsi manual

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

S-EDIT FILE

T-SPICE (AFTER SCHEMATIC)1) Open T-SPICE file from schematic window toolbar and save it in the desired location(do save

as )2) On toolbar of the T-SPICE click on INSERT COMMAND prompt3) Keep the cursor where the arrow marks

shown of the T-SPCIE window and Select

FILES-gtLibrary fileBrowse for the technology file (path my doc Tanner EDA tanner toollibraries models generic_025lib)and Type TT in the Library --- gt Click on insert button

Voltage Source-gtConstant -gtVoltage Source name V1

-gtPositive terminal Vdd -gtNegetive terminal Gnd -gtDC value 5

To initialize the input Voltage source name v2 Positive terminal wirte the port name what you have given in

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 3 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

the schematic diagram Negetive terminal Gnd DC value 5 input can be bit stream or pulse

Then click on insert button

Analysis in this select Transient

maximum step size 10n simulation length 100n start time 0n(Note above values can vary subject to design)Then click on insert button

DC analysis DC transfer sweep sweep type linear parameter type source parameter name name the voltage source of the input start voltage 0 and Stop voltage 5Increment 01( as your wish) Then click on acceptNext click on insert button

Output click on transient result if the analysis is transient click on DC results is the analysis is DC analysis enter the node name of both input and output ( which waveforms you have to observer that particulars node names should be entered)

click on insert buttonSAVE

4) Select the RUN simulation option from the toolbar (Click on the green arrow )5) Verify the waveforms

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 4 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

T-SPICE FILE (AFTER inserting the commands ndash netlist of the schematic)For Transient Analysis and DC Analysis

W-EDIT WAVEFORM (S) after clicking the simulation button in the T-SPICE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 5 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

L-EDIT

1) Open L-EDIT icon on desktop2) Select FILE from toolbar and go to New File3) Browse and add TDB setup file Generic_025tdb ( my doc tanner EDA tanner toolsLVS and L-

edit techgeneric_0254) Go to Cell in the tool bar Select instance browse for T-Cells ( path my doc tanner EDA T-

Cells or my doc T-Cells ) and select instantiate p and n transistors from T-cell library (TC_NMOS and TC_PMOS)Keep the L and W values of transistors same as in s-edit

5) Complete the layout connections and Select lsquoArsquo (port) option from toolbar to NAME all the ports as per the schematic circuit design

6) Click on the layer you want to name7) Select the ON LAYER and enter its PORT NAME8) SAVE the file in the form - ltfilename_ltdbgt9) Perform Design rule check and if any errors correct all the errors10) Click on Setup Extract

-gtCheck on (check book ) extract standard rule set- click on the pencilpen icon browse the path for extract file ( my doc tanner eda tanner tools LVS and L-edit tech

generic_025ugenericext give the output location where you want to save ( T-SPICE of the Layout )

11) Select EXTRACT from the toolbar12) Next open the T-SPICE file where you have save and repeat all the steps the 2 to 6 of the T-

SPICE ( what you did after the schematic) LAYOUT

T-SPICE FILE (netlist of the layout )

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 6 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

W-EDIT WAVEFORM (S) AFTER LAYOUT

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 7 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

LVS

1)Open LVS from the desktop2)Go to New-gtLVS Setup-gtAdd layout and schematic netlist which are spice files3)Perform Run Verification4)Check for the schematic and layout equality

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 8 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 2AIM Draw the circuits for nand and nor for specified length and width using schematic and for the same draw the layout

a) For the above verify the timing diagrams in both schematic and layoutb) Perform LVS for the same

S-EDIT PROCEDURE

T-SPICE FILE

W-EDIT FILE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 9 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

L-Edit Procedure1) Construct the layout as shown below

2)Set up extraction and extract the spice output3)Add all the required simulation commands and check for the waveforms These waveforms should match the Schematic waveforms4) Perform the LVS to check whether schematic and layouts are same Similarly perform an experiment for NOR functionality as well

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 10 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

SchematicLayout

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 11 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 3AIM Draw the circuits for XOR and XNOR for specified length and width using schematic and for the same draw the layout

a) For the above verify the timing diagrams in both schematic and layoutb) Plot voltage vs time and input voltage vs output voltagec) Perform the LVS to check circuit and layout equality

Theory XOR Gate The exclusive-OR (XOR) operator uses the symbol and it performs the following logic oplusoperation X oplus Y = X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y The graphic symbol and truth table of XOR gate is shown in the figure

The result is 1 only when either X is equal to 1 or Y is equal to 1 but not when both X and Y are equal to 1

XNOR Gate The exclusive-NOR (XNOR) operator uses the symbol 1048703 and it performs the following logic operation X 10487031048703Y = X Y + Xrsquo Yrsquo = (X oplus Y)rsquo The graphic symbol and truth table of XNOR (Equivalence) gate is shown in the figure

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 12 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

The result is 1 when either both X and Y are 0rsquos or when both are 1rsquos That is why this gate is often referred to as the Equivalence gate The truth tables clearly show that the exclusive-NOR operation is the complement of the exclusive-OR This can also be shown by algebraic manipulation as follows (X Y)rsquo = (X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y)rsquo oplus

= (X Yrsquo)rsquo (Xrsquo Y)rsquo = (Xrsquo + Y) (X + Yrsquo) = (XY + XrsquoYrsquo)

= X 10487031048703Y

The XOR gate can be constructed using MOSFETS as shown below

Schematic

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 13 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

T-Spice

Layout

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 14 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Spice Net list(Layout)

Waveforms

Perform the LVS for both schematic and layout

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 15 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Similarly perform an experiment for XNOR functionality as wellSchematic

Net List

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 16 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Layout

Simulations

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 17 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 4AIM Draw the circuits for AND gate and OR gate for specified length and width using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same draw the layout

a) For the above verify the timing diagrams in both schematic and layoutb) Plot voltage vs time and input voltage vs output voltagec) Perform the LVS to check circuit and layout equality

Procedure

And Gate1)Construct NAND gate and Inverter using the procedure mentioned before in s-edit using

MOSFETs2)Create a symbol for Nand and Inverter with the procedure below

Creating a Symbol 1)Construct a Nand Gate with MOSFETs as shown below2)Go to Cell in the tool bar and click on Update Symbol The symbol will be created Check for itrsquos

functionality in T-spice and save the s-edit project

3)Similarly construct the Inverter and update the symbol Check itrsquos functionality in T-spice and save the s-edit project

4)Open a new project to construct and gate Go to Add in the library Browser and add Nand and Inverter files which were constructed as shown below

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 18 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

5)Construct the And circuit with the symbols of Nand and inverter as shown below

6)Check the functionality in T-spice

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 19 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Waveforms in W-Edit

L-Edit

Note Add one inverter to the output of Nand gate Use poly contact while joining poly and metal

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 20 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

7)Similarly Construct Or gate using component instantiation in s-edit Verify itrsquos functionality using T-spiceBuild the layout by adding inverter to the output of the NOR gate

8)Perform the LVS for schematic and layout in both And gate as well as in Or gate to check the circuit equality in schematic and layout

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 21 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 5AIM Simplify the given expression and implement using the Universal (NAND) Logic Gates Use automatic place and Route for the layout

Ex 1) Y = ABrsquoCrsquo+ArsquoBrsquoCrsquo+ArsquoBCrsquo+ArsquoBrsquoC Simplify thisThis can be reduced to ArsquoBrsquo+BrsquoCrsquo+CrsquoArsquo

Procedure1 Construct the schematic for the above equation using only universal gates (Nand)2 Before implementing in schematic check the cell name and the port names of the logic

gates to be used in the circuit3 Steps for the (2)

a Open the L-Editor File-gtNew-gtbrowse for morbn20dtdb file(MyDocumentsmorbn20dmorbn20dtdb)

b Go to Cell-gtInstance-gtbrowse for morbn20d file (same path as above)Now go through the list of the library components Click the required cell and instantiate in the L-Editor From that instance note down the input and output port names And also note the cell name in the list

4 In schematic Editor ( this steps are only for the logic gates(ex Only for one nand gate)a File-gtNew Design-gtDesign Nameb Cell-gtNew Cell-gtcell name(same as the cell name in L-Editor library)c Draw the schematic and give the input and output names same as(3b)d Update the symbol Cell-gtUpdate symbole Go to properties window click on property icon(View-gtproperties)

and add the properties as shown in the below window

5 Implement the given expression in a New design instantiating the cell created in step (4) in S-Editor

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 22 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

6 Once the circuit is completed check for errors and simulation Export the design by using following stepsFiles-gtExport-gtExport TPR-gt Give the path (your design folder) to save the exported file in tpr format and click on Export

7 Go to L-Edit open New Design File-gtNew-gtbrowse for morbn20dtdb file(MyDocumentsmorbn20dmorbn20dtdb)

8 Click on Tools (from toolbar) -gt SPR -gt Place and Route9 A window will pop up Uncheck the last two options(Pad setup) Then click on Setup

from the same window Here browse for the technology file(morban20dext) and browse the path of the net list file ( tpr file path saved in step(6) ) Click on OK and then click on Run button

10 Layout will be generated automatically in the layout window for the designed circuit

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 23 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Example of the tpr file

C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_1 A A N_1C Nand3 A B C OutUNand3_1 N_6 N_5 N_4 OutC Nand2 A B OutUNand2_2 B B N_2C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_3 C C N_3C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_4 N_2 N_1 N_4C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_5 N_3 N_2 N_5C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_6 N_1 N_3 N_6

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 24 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 6AIM Draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor for

a) J K Flip flopb) J K Master Slave Flip flopc) D Flip flopd) T Flip flop

Verify the timing diagrams in schematic and generate the layout for the same using Place and route

Procedure

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 25 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Follow the same procedure given in the Experiment 5

Layout generated layout for the MSJKFF

Similarly implement for the DFF and TFF

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 26 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 7

AIM Design Serial and paralle adder and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

Circuit Diagram

ProcedureSame as in experiment 5

S-EDIT FILE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 27 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Generated Layout for the above circuit

Note Similar procedure is followed for the construction of parallel AdderThe schematic of parallel adder is as given below

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 28 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 8AIM Design 41 Mux and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematicImplement using universal gatesProcedureFollow the steps as in experiment 5S-Edit

Generated layout for the above circuit

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 29 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 9AIM Design of Asynchronous Synchronous Up-Down counters with minimum number of gates and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

DESIGN OF SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER

TRUTH TABLEQ3 Q2 Q1 Q0 Q3

+ Q2+ Q1

+ Q0+

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 1 0 0 1 00 0 1 0 0 0 1 10 0 1 1 0 1 0 00 1 0 0 0 1 0 10 1 0 1 0 1 1 00 1 1 0 0 1 1 10 1 1 1 1 0 0 01 0 0 0 1 0 0 11 0 0 1 1 0 1 01 0 1 0 1 0 1 11 0 1 1 1 1 0 01 1 0 0 1 1 0 11 1 0 1 1 1 1 01 1 1 0 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

Now using the karnaugh map we find the simplified expressions for Q3+ Q2

+ Q1+ Q0

+

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 30 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

PROCEDURE

1) In the first step for building the circuit for a synchronous counter design a D-FF using NAND2 NAND3 gates as shown below using component instantiation (create the cell name and port name same as in the morbon20(in L-edit))

2) Update the symbol

3) Add the DFF cell(symbol) in the library Instantiate DFF to build the Asynchronous counter Same way build the circuit for Synchronous counter along with required gates as per the above design

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 31 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Asynchronous Counter

Synchronous Counter

4) Check the working of the both COUNTERs and verify the truth table as per the usual procedure of T-SPICE and W-EDIT

W-EDIT FILE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 32 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

5) Export the schematic and generate the layout by TPR

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 33 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 10

AIM Design SERIAL REGISTER capable of holding and shifting 4 bit words and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

Circuit

A Simple Shift Register Consisting of D-type Flip-flops

PROCEDURE

1) Use the same DFF used in counters

2) Circuit diagram

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 34 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

3) Export the schematic and generate the layout by TPR

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 35 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 12

AIM Design a barrel shifter using nMOSFETs and draw the schematic in schematic editor Verify the timing diagrams in schematic for shift right operation

TheoryA barrel shifter is a digital circuit that can shift a data word by a specified number of bits in one clock cycle It can be implemented as a sequence of multiplexers (mux) and in such an implementation the output of one mux is connected to the input of the next mux in a way that depends on the shift distance

For example take a 4-bit barrel shifter with inputs A B C and D The shifter can cycle the order of the bits ABCD as DABC CDAB or BCDA in this case no bits are lost That is it can shift all of the outputs up to three positions to the right (and thus make any cyclic combination of A B C and D) The barrel shifter has a variety of applications including being a vital component in microprocessors (alongside the ALU)

A common usage of a barrel shifter is in the hardware implementation of floating-point arithmetic For a floating-point add or subtract operation the significant of the two numbers must be aligned which requires shifting the smaller number to the right increasing its exponent until it matches the exponent of the larger number This is done by subtracting the exponents and using the barrel shifter to shift the smaller number to the right by the difference in one cycle If a simple shifter were used shifting by n bit positions would require n clock cycles

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 36 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 37 37 Mr Ravikant G B

  • The Digital Inverter or NOT gate
  • PROCEDURE
  • XOR Gate
  • The exclusive-OR (XOR) operator uses the symbol oplus and it performs the following logic operation
  • X oplus Y = X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y
  • The result is 1 only when either X is equal to 1 or Y is equal to 1 but not when both X and Y are equal to 1
  • XNOR Gate
  • The exclusive-NOR (XNOR) operator uses the symbol 1048703 and it performs the following logic operation
  • X 1048703Y = X Y + Xrsquo Yrsquo = (X oplus Y)rsquo
  • The result is 1 when either both X and Y are 0rsquos or when both are 1rsquos That is why this gate is often referred to as the Equivalence gate
  • The truth tables clearly show that the exclusive-NOR operation is the complement of the exclusive-OR
  • This can also be shown by algebraic manipulation as follows
  • (X oplus Y)rsquo = (X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y)rsquo
  • = (X Yrsquo)rsquo (Xrsquo Y)rsquo = (Xrsquo + Y) (X + Yrsquo)
  • = (XY + XrsquoYrsquo)
Page 4: vlsi manual

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

the schematic diagram Negetive terminal Gnd DC value 5 input can be bit stream or pulse

Then click on insert button

Analysis in this select Transient

maximum step size 10n simulation length 100n start time 0n(Note above values can vary subject to design)Then click on insert button

DC analysis DC transfer sweep sweep type linear parameter type source parameter name name the voltage source of the input start voltage 0 and Stop voltage 5Increment 01( as your wish) Then click on acceptNext click on insert button

Output click on transient result if the analysis is transient click on DC results is the analysis is DC analysis enter the node name of both input and output ( which waveforms you have to observer that particulars node names should be entered)

click on insert buttonSAVE

4) Select the RUN simulation option from the toolbar (Click on the green arrow )5) Verify the waveforms

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 4 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

T-SPICE FILE (AFTER inserting the commands ndash netlist of the schematic)For Transient Analysis and DC Analysis

W-EDIT WAVEFORM (S) after clicking the simulation button in the T-SPICE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 5 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

L-EDIT

1) Open L-EDIT icon on desktop2) Select FILE from toolbar and go to New File3) Browse and add TDB setup file Generic_025tdb ( my doc tanner EDA tanner toolsLVS and L-

edit techgeneric_0254) Go to Cell in the tool bar Select instance browse for T-Cells ( path my doc tanner EDA T-

Cells or my doc T-Cells ) and select instantiate p and n transistors from T-cell library (TC_NMOS and TC_PMOS)Keep the L and W values of transistors same as in s-edit

5) Complete the layout connections and Select lsquoArsquo (port) option from toolbar to NAME all the ports as per the schematic circuit design

6) Click on the layer you want to name7) Select the ON LAYER and enter its PORT NAME8) SAVE the file in the form - ltfilename_ltdbgt9) Perform Design rule check and if any errors correct all the errors10) Click on Setup Extract

-gtCheck on (check book ) extract standard rule set- click on the pencilpen icon browse the path for extract file ( my doc tanner eda tanner tools LVS and L-edit tech

generic_025ugenericext give the output location where you want to save ( T-SPICE of the Layout )

11) Select EXTRACT from the toolbar12) Next open the T-SPICE file where you have save and repeat all the steps the 2 to 6 of the T-

SPICE ( what you did after the schematic) LAYOUT

T-SPICE FILE (netlist of the layout )

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 6 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

W-EDIT WAVEFORM (S) AFTER LAYOUT

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 7 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

LVS

1)Open LVS from the desktop2)Go to New-gtLVS Setup-gtAdd layout and schematic netlist which are spice files3)Perform Run Verification4)Check for the schematic and layout equality

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 8 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 2AIM Draw the circuits for nand and nor for specified length and width using schematic and for the same draw the layout

a) For the above verify the timing diagrams in both schematic and layoutb) Perform LVS for the same

S-EDIT PROCEDURE

T-SPICE FILE

W-EDIT FILE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 9 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

L-Edit Procedure1) Construct the layout as shown below

2)Set up extraction and extract the spice output3)Add all the required simulation commands and check for the waveforms These waveforms should match the Schematic waveforms4) Perform the LVS to check whether schematic and layouts are same Similarly perform an experiment for NOR functionality as well

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 10 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

SchematicLayout

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 11 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 3AIM Draw the circuits for XOR and XNOR for specified length and width using schematic and for the same draw the layout

a) For the above verify the timing diagrams in both schematic and layoutb) Plot voltage vs time and input voltage vs output voltagec) Perform the LVS to check circuit and layout equality

Theory XOR Gate The exclusive-OR (XOR) operator uses the symbol and it performs the following logic oplusoperation X oplus Y = X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y The graphic symbol and truth table of XOR gate is shown in the figure

The result is 1 only when either X is equal to 1 or Y is equal to 1 but not when both X and Y are equal to 1

XNOR Gate The exclusive-NOR (XNOR) operator uses the symbol 1048703 and it performs the following logic operation X 10487031048703Y = X Y + Xrsquo Yrsquo = (X oplus Y)rsquo The graphic symbol and truth table of XNOR (Equivalence) gate is shown in the figure

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 12 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

The result is 1 when either both X and Y are 0rsquos or when both are 1rsquos That is why this gate is often referred to as the Equivalence gate The truth tables clearly show that the exclusive-NOR operation is the complement of the exclusive-OR This can also be shown by algebraic manipulation as follows (X Y)rsquo = (X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y)rsquo oplus

= (X Yrsquo)rsquo (Xrsquo Y)rsquo = (Xrsquo + Y) (X + Yrsquo) = (XY + XrsquoYrsquo)

= X 10487031048703Y

The XOR gate can be constructed using MOSFETS as shown below

Schematic

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 13 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

T-Spice

Layout

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 14 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Spice Net list(Layout)

Waveforms

Perform the LVS for both schematic and layout

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 15 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Similarly perform an experiment for XNOR functionality as wellSchematic

Net List

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 16 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Layout

Simulations

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 17 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 4AIM Draw the circuits for AND gate and OR gate for specified length and width using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same draw the layout

a) For the above verify the timing diagrams in both schematic and layoutb) Plot voltage vs time and input voltage vs output voltagec) Perform the LVS to check circuit and layout equality

Procedure

And Gate1)Construct NAND gate and Inverter using the procedure mentioned before in s-edit using

MOSFETs2)Create a symbol for Nand and Inverter with the procedure below

Creating a Symbol 1)Construct a Nand Gate with MOSFETs as shown below2)Go to Cell in the tool bar and click on Update Symbol The symbol will be created Check for itrsquos

functionality in T-spice and save the s-edit project

3)Similarly construct the Inverter and update the symbol Check itrsquos functionality in T-spice and save the s-edit project

4)Open a new project to construct and gate Go to Add in the library Browser and add Nand and Inverter files which were constructed as shown below

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 18 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

5)Construct the And circuit with the symbols of Nand and inverter as shown below

6)Check the functionality in T-spice

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 19 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Waveforms in W-Edit

L-Edit

Note Add one inverter to the output of Nand gate Use poly contact while joining poly and metal

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 20 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

7)Similarly Construct Or gate using component instantiation in s-edit Verify itrsquos functionality using T-spiceBuild the layout by adding inverter to the output of the NOR gate

8)Perform the LVS for schematic and layout in both And gate as well as in Or gate to check the circuit equality in schematic and layout

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 21 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 5AIM Simplify the given expression and implement using the Universal (NAND) Logic Gates Use automatic place and Route for the layout

Ex 1) Y = ABrsquoCrsquo+ArsquoBrsquoCrsquo+ArsquoBCrsquo+ArsquoBrsquoC Simplify thisThis can be reduced to ArsquoBrsquo+BrsquoCrsquo+CrsquoArsquo

Procedure1 Construct the schematic for the above equation using only universal gates (Nand)2 Before implementing in schematic check the cell name and the port names of the logic

gates to be used in the circuit3 Steps for the (2)

a Open the L-Editor File-gtNew-gtbrowse for morbn20dtdb file(MyDocumentsmorbn20dmorbn20dtdb)

b Go to Cell-gtInstance-gtbrowse for morbn20d file (same path as above)Now go through the list of the library components Click the required cell and instantiate in the L-Editor From that instance note down the input and output port names And also note the cell name in the list

4 In schematic Editor ( this steps are only for the logic gates(ex Only for one nand gate)a File-gtNew Design-gtDesign Nameb Cell-gtNew Cell-gtcell name(same as the cell name in L-Editor library)c Draw the schematic and give the input and output names same as(3b)d Update the symbol Cell-gtUpdate symbole Go to properties window click on property icon(View-gtproperties)

and add the properties as shown in the below window

5 Implement the given expression in a New design instantiating the cell created in step (4) in S-Editor

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 22 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

6 Once the circuit is completed check for errors and simulation Export the design by using following stepsFiles-gtExport-gtExport TPR-gt Give the path (your design folder) to save the exported file in tpr format and click on Export

7 Go to L-Edit open New Design File-gtNew-gtbrowse for morbn20dtdb file(MyDocumentsmorbn20dmorbn20dtdb)

8 Click on Tools (from toolbar) -gt SPR -gt Place and Route9 A window will pop up Uncheck the last two options(Pad setup) Then click on Setup

from the same window Here browse for the technology file(morban20dext) and browse the path of the net list file ( tpr file path saved in step(6) ) Click on OK and then click on Run button

10 Layout will be generated automatically in the layout window for the designed circuit

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 23 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Example of the tpr file

C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_1 A A N_1C Nand3 A B C OutUNand3_1 N_6 N_5 N_4 OutC Nand2 A B OutUNand2_2 B B N_2C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_3 C C N_3C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_4 N_2 N_1 N_4C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_5 N_3 N_2 N_5C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_6 N_1 N_3 N_6

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 24 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 6AIM Draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor for

a) J K Flip flopb) J K Master Slave Flip flopc) D Flip flopd) T Flip flop

Verify the timing diagrams in schematic and generate the layout for the same using Place and route

Procedure

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 25 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Follow the same procedure given in the Experiment 5

Layout generated layout for the MSJKFF

Similarly implement for the DFF and TFF

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 26 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 7

AIM Design Serial and paralle adder and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

Circuit Diagram

ProcedureSame as in experiment 5

S-EDIT FILE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 27 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Generated Layout for the above circuit

Note Similar procedure is followed for the construction of parallel AdderThe schematic of parallel adder is as given below

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 28 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 8AIM Design 41 Mux and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematicImplement using universal gatesProcedureFollow the steps as in experiment 5S-Edit

Generated layout for the above circuit

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 29 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 9AIM Design of Asynchronous Synchronous Up-Down counters with minimum number of gates and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

DESIGN OF SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER

TRUTH TABLEQ3 Q2 Q1 Q0 Q3

+ Q2+ Q1

+ Q0+

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 1 0 0 1 00 0 1 0 0 0 1 10 0 1 1 0 1 0 00 1 0 0 0 1 0 10 1 0 1 0 1 1 00 1 1 0 0 1 1 10 1 1 1 1 0 0 01 0 0 0 1 0 0 11 0 0 1 1 0 1 01 0 1 0 1 0 1 11 0 1 1 1 1 0 01 1 0 0 1 1 0 11 1 0 1 1 1 1 01 1 1 0 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

Now using the karnaugh map we find the simplified expressions for Q3+ Q2

+ Q1+ Q0

+

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 30 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

PROCEDURE

1) In the first step for building the circuit for a synchronous counter design a D-FF using NAND2 NAND3 gates as shown below using component instantiation (create the cell name and port name same as in the morbon20(in L-edit))

2) Update the symbol

3) Add the DFF cell(symbol) in the library Instantiate DFF to build the Asynchronous counter Same way build the circuit for Synchronous counter along with required gates as per the above design

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 31 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Asynchronous Counter

Synchronous Counter

4) Check the working of the both COUNTERs and verify the truth table as per the usual procedure of T-SPICE and W-EDIT

W-EDIT FILE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 32 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

5) Export the schematic and generate the layout by TPR

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 33 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 10

AIM Design SERIAL REGISTER capable of holding and shifting 4 bit words and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

Circuit

A Simple Shift Register Consisting of D-type Flip-flops

PROCEDURE

1) Use the same DFF used in counters

2) Circuit diagram

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 34 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

3) Export the schematic and generate the layout by TPR

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 35 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 12

AIM Design a barrel shifter using nMOSFETs and draw the schematic in schematic editor Verify the timing diagrams in schematic for shift right operation

TheoryA barrel shifter is a digital circuit that can shift a data word by a specified number of bits in one clock cycle It can be implemented as a sequence of multiplexers (mux) and in such an implementation the output of one mux is connected to the input of the next mux in a way that depends on the shift distance

For example take a 4-bit barrel shifter with inputs A B C and D The shifter can cycle the order of the bits ABCD as DABC CDAB or BCDA in this case no bits are lost That is it can shift all of the outputs up to three positions to the right (and thus make any cyclic combination of A B C and D) The barrel shifter has a variety of applications including being a vital component in microprocessors (alongside the ALU)

A common usage of a barrel shifter is in the hardware implementation of floating-point arithmetic For a floating-point add or subtract operation the significant of the two numbers must be aligned which requires shifting the smaller number to the right increasing its exponent until it matches the exponent of the larger number This is done by subtracting the exponents and using the barrel shifter to shift the smaller number to the right by the difference in one cycle If a simple shifter were used shifting by n bit positions would require n clock cycles

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 36 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 37 37 Mr Ravikant G B

  • The Digital Inverter or NOT gate
  • PROCEDURE
  • XOR Gate
  • The exclusive-OR (XOR) operator uses the symbol oplus and it performs the following logic operation
  • X oplus Y = X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y
  • The result is 1 only when either X is equal to 1 or Y is equal to 1 but not when both X and Y are equal to 1
  • XNOR Gate
  • The exclusive-NOR (XNOR) operator uses the symbol 1048703 and it performs the following logic operation
  • X 1048703Y = X Y + Xrsquo Yrsquo = (X oplus Y)rsquo
  • The result is 1 when either both X and Y are 0rsquos or when both are 1rsquos That is why this gate is often referred to as the Equivalence gate
  • The truth tables clearly show that the exclusive-NOR operation is the complement of the exclusive-OR
  • This can also be shown by algebraic manipulation as follows
  • (X oplus Y)rsquo = (X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y)rsquo
  • = (X Yrsquo)rsquo (Xrsquo Y)rsquo = (Xrsquo + Y) (X + Yrsquo)
  • = (XY + XrsquoYrsquo)
Page 5: vlsi manual

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

T-SPICE FILE (AFTER inserting the commands ndash netlist of the schematic)For Transient Analysis and DC Analysis

W-EDIT WAVEFORM (S) after clicking the simulation button in the T-SPICE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 5 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

L-EDIT

1) Open L-EDIT icon on desktop2) Select FILE from toolbar and go to New File3) Browse and add TDB setup file Generic_025tdb ( my doc tanner EDA tanner toolsLVS and L-

edit techgeneric_0254) Go to Cell in the tool bar Select instance browse for T-Cells ( path my doc tanner EDA T-

Cells or my doc T-Cells ) and select instantiate p and n transistors from T-cell library (TC_NMOS and TC_PMOS)Keep the L and W values of transistors same as in s-edit

5) Complete the layout connections and Select lsquoArsquo (port) option from toolbar to NAME all the ports as per the schematic circuit design

6) Click on the layer you want to name7) Select the ON LAYER and enter its PORT NAME8) SAVE the file in the form - ltfilename_ltdbgt9) Perform Design rule check and if any errors correct all the errors10) Click on Setup Extract

-gtCheck on (check book ) extract standard rule set- click on the pencilpen icon browse the path for extract file ( my doc tanner eda tanner tools LVS and L-edit tech

generic_025ugenericext give the output location where you want to save ( T-SPICE of the Layout )

11) Select EXTRACT from the toolbar12) Next open the T-SPICE file where you have save and repeat all the steps the 2 to 6 of the T-

SPICE ( what you did after the schematic) LAYOUT

T-SPICE FILE (netlist of the layout )

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 6 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

W-EDIT WAVEFORM (S) AFTER LAYOUT

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 7 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

LVS

1)Open LVS from the desktop2)Go to New-gtLVS Setup-gtAdd layout and schematic netlist which are spice files3)Perform Run Verification4)Check for the schematic and layout equality

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 8 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 2AIM Draw the circuits for nand and nor for specified length and width using schematic and for the same draw the layout

a) For the above verify the timing diagrams in both schematic and layoutb) Perform LVS for the same

S-EDIT PROCEDURE

T-SPICE FILE

W-EDIT FILE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 9 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

L-Edit Procedure1) Construct the layout as shown below

2)Set up extraction and extract the spice output3)Add all the required simulation commands and check for the waveforms These waveforms should match the Schematic waveforms4) Perform the LVS to check whether schematic and layouts are same Similarly perform an experiment for NOR functionality as well

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 10 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

SchematicLayout

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 11 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 3AIM Draw the circuits for XOR and XNOR for specified length and width using schematic and for the same draw the layout

a) For the above verify the timing diagrams in both schematic and layoutb) Plot voltage vs time and input voltage vs output voltagec) Perform the LVS to check circuit and layout equality

Theory XOR Gate The exclusive-OR (XOR) operator uses the symbol and it performs the following logic oplusoperation X oplus Y = X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y The graphic symbol and truth table of XOR gate is shown in the figure

The result is 1 only when either X is equal to 1 or Y is equal to 1 but not when both X and Y are equal to 1

XNOR Gate The exclusive-NOR (XNOR) operator uses the symbol 1048703 and it performs the following logic operation X 10487031048703Y = X Y + Xrsquo Yrsquo = (X oplus Y)rsquo The graphic symbol and truth table of XNOR (Equivalence) gate is shown in the figure

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 12 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

The result is 1 when either both X and Y are 0rsquos or when both are 1rsquos That is why this gate is often referred to as the Equivalence gate The truth tables clearly show that the exclusive-NOR operation is the complement of the exclusive-OR This can also be shown by algebraic manipulation as follows (X Y)rsquo = (X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y)rsquo oplus

= (X Yrsquo)rsquo (Xrsquo Y)rsquo = (Xrsquo + Y) (X + Yrsquo) = (XY + XrsquoYrsquo)

= X 10487031048703Y

The XOR gate can be constructed using MOSFETS as shown below

Schematic

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 13 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

T-Spice

Layout

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 14 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Spice Net list(Layout)

Waveforms

Perform the LVS for both schematic and layout

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 15 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Similarly perform an experiment for XNOR functionality as wellSchematic

Net List

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 16 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Layout

Simulations

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 17 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 4AIM Draw the circuits for AND gate and OR gate for specified length and width using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same draw the layout

a) For the above verify the timing diagrams in both schematic and layoutb) Plot voltage vs time and input voltage vs output voltagec) Perform the LVS to check circuit and layout equality

Procedure

And Gate1)Construct NAND gate and Inverter using the procedure mentioned before in s-edit using

MOSFETs2)Create a symbol for Nand and Inverter with the procedure below

Creating a Symbol 1)Construct a Nand Gate with MOSFETs as shown below2)Go to Cell in the tool bar and click on Update Symbol The symbol will be created Check for itrsquos

functionality in T-spice and save the s-edit project

3)Similarly construct the Inverter and update the symbol Check itrsquos functionality in T-spice and save the s-edit project

4)Open a new project to construct and gate Go to Add in the library Browser and add Nand and Inverter files which were constructed as shown below

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 18 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

5)Construct the And circuit with the symbols of Nand and inverter as shown below

6)Check the functionality in T-spice

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 19 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Waveforms in W-Edit

L-Edit

Note Add one inverter to the output of Nand gate Use poly contact while joining poly and metal

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 20 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

7)Similarly Construct Or gate using component instantiation in s-edit Verify itrsquos functionality using T-spiceBuild the layout by adding inverter to the output of the NOR gate

8)Perform the LVS for schematic and layout in both And gate as well as in Or gate to check the circuit equality in schematic and layout

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 21 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 5AIM Simplify the given expression and implement using the Universal (NAND) Logic Gates Use automatic place and Route for the layout

Ex 1) Y = ABrsquoCrsquo+ArsquoBrsquoCrsquo+ArsquoBCrsquo+ArsquoBrsquoC Simplify thisThis can be reduced to ArsquoBrsquo+BrsquoCrsquo+CrsquoArsquo

Procedure1 Construct the schematic for the above equation using only universal gates (Nand)2 Before implementing in schematic check the cell name and the port names of the logic

gates to be used in the circuit3 Steps for the (2)

a Open the L-Editor File-gtNew-gtbrowse for morbn20dtdb file(MyDocumentsmorbn20dmorbn20dtdb)

b Go to Cell-gtInstance-gtbrowse for morbn20d file (same path as above)Now go through the list of the library components Click the required cell and instantiate in the L-Editor From that instance note down the input and output port names And also note the cell name in the list

4 In schematic Editor ( this steps are only for the logic gates(ex Only for one nand gate)a File-gtNew Design-gtDesign Nameb Cell-gtNew Cell-gtcell name(same as the cell name in L-Editor library)c Draw the schematic and give the input and output names same as(3b)d Update the symbol Cell-gtUpdate symbole Go to properties window click on property icon(View-gtproperties)

and add the properties as shown in the below window

5 Implement the given expression in a New design instantiating the cell created in step (4) in S-Editor

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 22 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

6 Once the circuit is completed check for errors and simulation Export the design by using following stepsFiles-gtExport-gtExport TPR-gt Give the path (your design folder) to save the exported file in tpr format and click on Export

7 Go to L-Edit open New Design File-gtNew-gtbrowse for morbn20dtdb file(MyDocumentsmorbn20dmorbn20dtdb)

8 Click on Tools (from toolbar) -gt SPR -gt Place and Route9 A window will pop up Uncheck the last two options(Pad setup) Then click on Setup

from the same window Here browse for the technology file(morban20dext) and browse the path of the net list file ( tpr file path saved in step(6) ) Click on OK and then click on Run button

10 Layout will be generated automatically in the layout window for the designed circuit

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 23 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Example of the tpr file

C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_1 A A N_1C Nand3 A B C OutUNand3_1 N_6 N_5 N_4 OutC Nand2 A B OutUNand2_2 B B N_2C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_3 C C N_3C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_4 N_2 N_1 N_4C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_5 N_3 N_2 N_5C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_6 N_1 N_3 N_6

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 24 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 6AIM Draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor for

a) J K Flip flopb) J K Master Slave Flip flopc) D Flip flopd) T Flip flop

Verify the timing diagrams in schematic and generate the layout for the same using Place and route

Procedure

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 25 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Follow the same procedure given in the Experiment 5

Layout generated layout for the MSJKFF

Similarly implement for the DFF and TFF

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 26 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 7

AIM Design Serial and paralle adder and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

Circuit Diagram

ProcedureSame as in experiment 5

S-EDIT FILE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 27 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Generated Layout for the above circuit

Note Similar procedure is followed for the construction of parallel AdderThe schematic of parallel adder is as given below

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 28 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 8AIM Design 41 Mux and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematicImplement using universal gatesProcedureFollow the steps as in experiment 5S-Edit

Generated layout for the above circuit

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 29 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 9AIM Design of Asynchronous Synchronous Up-Down counters with minimum number of gates and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

DESIGN OF SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER

TRUTH TABLEQ3 Q2 Q1 Q0 Q3

+ Q2+ Q1

+ Q0+

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 1 0 0 1 00 0 1 0 0 0 1 10 0 1 1 0 1 0 00 1 0 0 0 1 0 10 1 0 1 0 1 1 00 1 1 0 0 1 1 10 1 1 1 1 0 0 01 0 0 0 1 0 0 11 0 0 1 1 0 1 01 0 1 0 1 0 1 11 0 1 1 1 1 0 01 1 0 0 1 1 0 11 1 0 1 1 1 1 01 1 1 0 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

Now using the karnaugh map we find the simplified expressions for Q3+ Q2

+ Q1+ Q0

+

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 30 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

PROCEDURE

1) In the first step for building the circuit for a synchronous counter design a D-FF using NAND2 NAND3 gates as shown below using component instantiation (create the cell name and port name same as in the morbon20(in L-edit))

2) Update the symbol

3) Add the DFF cell(symbol) in the library Instantiate DFF to build the Asynchronous counter Same way build the circuit for Synchronous counter along with required gates as per the above design

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 31 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Asynchronous Counter

Synchronous Counter

4) Check the working of the both COUNTERs and verify the truth table as per the usual procedure of T-SPICE and W-EDIT

W-EDIT FILE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 32 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

5) Export the schematic and generate the layout by TPR

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 33 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 10

AIM Design SERIAL REGISTER capable of holding and shifting 4 bit words and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

Circuit

A Simple Shift Register Consisting of D-type Flip-flops

PROCEDURE

1) Use the same DFF used in counters

2) Circuit diagram

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 34 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

3) Export the schematic and generate the layout by TPR

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 35 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 12

AIM Design a barrel shifter using nMOSFETs and draw the schematic in schematic editor Verify the timing diagrams in schematic for shift right operation

TheoryA barrel shifter is a digital circuit that can shift a data word by a specified number of bits in one clock cycle It can be implemented as a sequence of multiplexers (mux) and in such an implementation the output of one mux is connected to the input of the next mux in a way that depends on the shift distance

For example take a 4-bit barrel shifter with inputs A B C and D The shifter can cycle the order of the bits ABCD as DABC CDAB or BCDA in this case no bits are lost That is it can shift all of the outputs up to three positions to the right (and thus make any cyclic combination of A B C and D) The barrel shifter has a variety of applications including being a vital component in microprocessors (alongside the ALU)

A common usage of a barrel shifter is in the hardware implementation of floating-point arithmetic For a floating-point add or subtract operation the significant of the two numbers must be aligned which requires shifting the smaller number to the right increasing its exponent until it matches the exponent of the larger number This is done by subtracting the exponents and using the barrel shifter to shift the smaller number to the right by the difference in one cycle If a simple shifter were used shifting by n bit positions would require n clock cycles

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 36 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 37 37 Mr Ravikant G B

  • The Digital Inverter or NOT gate
  • PROCEDURE
  • XOR Gate
  • The exclusive-OR (XOR) operator uses the symbol oplus and it performs the following logic operation
  • X oplus Y = X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y
  • The result is 1 only when either X is equal to 1 or Y is equal to 1 but not when both X and Y are equal to 1
  • XNOR Gate
  • The exclusive-NOR (XNOR) operator uses the symbol 1048703 and it performs the following logic operation
  • X 1048703Y = X Y + Xrsquo Yrsquo = (X oplus Y)rsquo
  • The result is 1 when either both X and Y are 0rsquos or when both are 1rsquos That is why this gate is often referred to as the Equivalence gate
  • The truth tables clearly show that the exclusive-NOR operation is the complement of the exclusive-OR
  • This can also be shown by algebraic manipulation as follows
  • (X oplus Y)rsquo = (X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y)rsquo
  • = (X Yrsquo)rsquo (Xrsquo Y)rsquo = (Xrsquo + Y) (X + Yrsquo)
  • = (XY + XrsquoYrsquo)
Page 6: vlsi manual

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

L-EDIT

1) Open L-EDIT icon on desktop2) Select FILE from toolbar and go to New File3) Browse and add TDB setup file Generic_025tdb ( my doc tanner EDA tanner toolsLVS and L-

edit techgeneric_0254) Go to Cell in the tool bar Select instance browse for T-Cells ( path my doc tanner EDA T-

Cells or my doc T-Cells ) and select instantiate p and n transistors from T-cell library (TC_NMOS and TC_PMOS)Keep the L and W values of transistors same as in s-edit

5) Complete the layout connections and Select lsquoArsquo (port) option from toolbar to NAME all the ports as per the schematic circuit design

6) Click on the layer you want to name7) Select the ON LAYER and enter its PORT NAME8) SAVE the file in the form - ltfilename_ltdbgt9) Perform Design rule check and if any errors correct all the errors10) Click on Setup Extract

-gtCheck on (check book ) extract standard rule set- click on the pencilpen icon browse the path for extract file ( my doc tanner eda tanner tools LVS and L-edit tech

generic_025ugenericext give the output location where you want to save ( T-SPICE of the Layout )

11) Select EXTRACT from the toolbar12) Next open the T-SPICE file where you have save and repeat all the steps the 2 to 6 of the T-

SPICE ( what you did after the schematic) LAYOUT

T-SPICE FILE (netlist of the layout )

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 6 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

W-EDIT WAVEFORM (S) AFTER LAYOUT

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 7 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

LVS

1)Open LVS from the desktop2)Go to New-gtLVS Setup-gtAdd layout and schematic netlist which are spice files3)Perform Run Verification4)Check for the schematic and layout equality

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 8 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 2AIM Draw the circuits for nand and nor for specified length and width using schematic and for the same draw the layout

a) For the above verify the timing diagrams in both schematic and layoutb) Perform LVS for the same

S-EDIT PROCEDURE

T-SPICE FILE

W-EDIT FILE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 9 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

L-Edit Procedure1) Construct the layout as shown below

2)Set up extraction and extract the spice output3)Add all the required simulation commands and check for the waveforms These waveforms should match the Schematic waveforms4) Perform the LVS to check whether schematic and layouts are same Similarly perform an experiment for NOR functionality as well

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 10 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

SchematicLayout

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 11 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 3AIM Draw the circuits for XOR and XNOR for specified length and width using schematic and for the same draw the layout

a) For the above verify the timing diagrams in both schematic and layoutb) Plot voltage vs time and input voltage vs output voltagec) Perform the LVS to check circuit and layout equality

Theory XOR Gate The exclusive-OR (XOR) operator uses the symbol and it performs the following logic oplusoperation X oplus Y = X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y The graphic symbol and truth table of XOR gate is shown in the figure

The result is 1 only when either X is equal to 1 or Y is equal to 1 but not when both X and Y are equal to 1

XNOR Gate The exclusive-NOR (XNOR) operator uses the symbol 1048703 and it performs the following logic operation X 10487031048703Y = X Y + Xrsquo Yrsquo = (X oplus Y)rsquo The graphic symbol and truth table of XNOR (Equivalence) gate is shown in the figure

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 12 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

The result is 1 when either both X and Y are 0rsquos or when both are 1rsquos That is why this gate is often referred to as the Equivalence gate The truth tables clearly show that the exclusive-NOR operation is the complement of the exclusive-OR This can also be shown by algebraic manipulation as follows (X Y)rsquo = (X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y)rsquo oplus

= (X Yrsquo)rsquo (Xrsquo Y)rsquo = (Xrsquo + Y) (X + Yrsquo) = (XY + XrsquoYrsquo)

= X 10487031048703Y

The XOR gate can be constructed using MOSFETS as shown below

Schematic

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 13 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

T-Spice

Layout

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 14 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Spice Net list(Layout)

Waveforms

Perform the LVS for both schematic and layout

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 15 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Similarly perform an experiment for XNOR functionality as wellSchematic

Net List

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 16 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Layout

Simulations

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 17 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 4AIM Draw the circuits for AND gate and OR gate for specified length and width using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same draw the layout

a) For the above verify the timing diagrams in both schematic and layoutb) Plot voltage vs time and input voltage vs output voltagec) Perform the LVS to check circuit and layout equality

Procedure

And Gate1)Construct NAND gate and Inverter using the procedure mentioned before in s-edit using

MOSFETs2)Create a symbol for Nand and Inverter with the procedure below

Creating a Symbol 1)Construct a Nand Gate with MOSFETs as shown below2)Go to Cell in the tool bar and click on Update Symbol The symbol will be created Check for itrsquos

functionality in T-spice and save the s-edit project

3)Similarly construct the Inverter and update the symbol Check itrsquos functionality in T-spice and save the s-edit project

4)Open a new project to construct and gate Go to Add in the library Browser and add Nand and Inverter files which were constructed as shown below

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 18 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

5)Construct the And circuit with the symbols of Nand and inverter as shown below

6)Check the functionality in T-spice

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 19 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Waveforms in W-Edit

L-Edit

Note Add one inverter to the output of Nand gate Use poly contact while joining poly and metal

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 20 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

7)Similarly Construct Or gate using component instantiation in s-edit Verify itrsquos functionality using T-spiceBuild the layout by adding inverter to the output of the NOR gate

8)Perform the LVS for schematic and layout in both And gate as well as in Or gate to check the circuit equality in schematic and layout

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 21 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 5AIM Simplify the given expression and implement using the Universal (NAND) Logic Gates Use automatic place and Route for the layout

Ex 1) Y = ABrsquoCrsquo+ArsquoBrsquoCrsquo+ArsquoBCrsquo+ArsquoBrsquoC Simplify thisThis can be reduced to ArsquoBrsquo+BrsquoCrsquo+CrsquoArsquo

Procedure1 Construct the schematic for the above equation using only universal gates (Nand)2 Before implementing in schematic check the cell name and the port names of the logic

gates to be used in the circuit3 Steps for the (2)

a Open the L-Editor File-gtNew-gtbrowse for morbn20dtdb file(MyDocumentsmorbn20dmorbn20dtdb)

b Go to Cell-gtInstance-gtbrowse for morbn20d file (same path as above)Now go through the list of the library components Click the required cell and instantiate in the L-Editor From that instance note down the input and output port names And also note the cell name in the list

4 In schematic Editor ( this steps are only for the logic gates(ex Only for one nand gate)a File-gtNew Design-gtDesign Nameb Cell-gtNew Cell-gtcell name(same as the cell name in L-Editor library)c Draw the schematic and give the input and output names same as(3b)d Update the symbol Cell-gtUpdate symbole Go to properties window click on property icon(View-gtproperties)

and add the properties as shown in the below window

5 Implement the given expression in a New design instantiating the cell created in step (4) in S-Editor

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 22 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

6 Once the circuit is completed check for errors and simulation Export the design by using following stepsFiles-gtExport-gtExport TPR-gt Give the path (your design folder) to save the exported file in tpr format and click on Export

7 Go to L-Edit open New Design File-gtNew-gtbrowse for morbn20dtdb file(MyDocumentsmorbn20dmorbn20dtdb)

8 Click on Tools (from toolbar) -gt SPR -gt Place and Route9 A window will pop up Uncheck the last two options(Pad setup) Then click on Setup

from the same window Here browse for the technology file(morban20dext) and browse the path of the net list file ( tpr file path saved in step(6) ) Click on OK and then click on Run button

10 Layout will be generated automatically in the layout window for the designed circuit

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 23 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Example of the tpr file

C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_1 A A N_1C Nand3 A B C OutUNand3_1 N_6 N_5 N_4 OutC Nand2 A B OutUNand2_2 B B N_2C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_3 C C N_3C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_4 N_2 N_1 N_4C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_5 N_3 N_2 N_5C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_6 N_1 N_3 N_6

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 24 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 6AIM Draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor for

a) J K Flip flopb) J K Master Slave Flip flopc) D Flip flopd) T Flip flop

Verify the timing diagrams in schematic and generate the layout for the same using Place and route

Procedure

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 25 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Follow the same procedure given in the Experiment 5

Layout generated layout for the MSJKFF

Similarly implement for the DFF and TFF

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 26 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 7

AIM Design Serial and paralle adder and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

Circuit Diagram

ProcedureSame as in experiment 5

S-EDIT FILE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 27 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Generated Layout for the above circuit

Note Similar procedure is followed for the construction of parallel AdderThe schematic of parallel adder is as given below

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 28 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 8AIM Design 41 Mux and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematicImplement using universal gatesProcedureFollow the steps as in experiment 5S-Edit

Generated layout for the above circuit

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 29 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 9AIM Design of Asynchronous Synchronous Up-Down counters with minimum number of gates and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

DESIGN OF SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER

TRUTH TABLEQ3 Q2 Q1 Q0 Q3

+ Q2+ Q1

+ Q0+

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 1 0 0 1 00 0 1 0 0 0 1 10 0 1 1 0 1 0 00 1 0 0 0 1 0 10 1 0 1 0 1 1 00 1 1 0 0 1 1 10 1 1 1 1 0 0 01 0 0 0 1 0 0 11 0 0 1 1 0 1 01 0 1 0 1 0 1 11 0 1 1 1 1 0 01 1 0 0 1 1 0 11 1 0 1 1 1 1 01 1 1 0 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

Now using the karnaugh map we find the simplified expressions for Q3+ Q2

+ Q1+ Q0

+

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 30 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

PROCEDURE

1) In the first step for building the circuit for a synchronous counter design a D-FF using NAND2 NAND3 gates as shown below using component instantiation (create the cell name and port name same as in the morbon20(in L-edit))

2) Update the symbol

3) Add the DFF cell(symbol) in the library Instantiate DFF to build the Asynchronous counter Same way build the circuit for Synchronous counter along with required gates as per the above design

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 31 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Asynchronous Counter

Synchronous Counter

4) Check the working of the both COUNTERs and verify the truth table as per the usual procedure of T-SPICE and W-EDIT

W-EDIT FILE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 32 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

5) Export the schematic and generate the layout by TPR

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 33 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 10

AIM Design SERIAL REGISTER capable of holding and shifting 4 bit words and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

Circuit

A Simple Shift Register Consisting of D-type Flip-flops

PROCEDURE

1) Use the same DFF used in counters

2) Circuit diagram

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 34 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

3) Export the schematic and generate the layout by TPR

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 35 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 12

AIM Design a barrel shifter using nMOSFETs and draw the schematic in schematic editor Verify the timing diagrams in schematic for shift right operation

TheoryA barrel shifter is a digital circuit that can shift a data word by a specified number of bits in one clock cycle It can be implemented as a sequence of multiplexers (mux) and in such an implementation the output of one mux is connected to the input of the next mux in a way that depends on the shift distance

For example take a 4-bit barrel shifter with inputs A B C and D The shifter can cycle the order of the bits ABCD as DABC CDAB or BCDA in this case no bits are lost That is it can shift all of the outputs up to three positions to the right (and thus make any cyclic combination of A B C and D) The barrel shifter has a variety of applications including being a vital component in microprocessors (alongside the ALU)

A common usage of a barrel shifter is in the hardware implementation of floating-point arithmetic For a floating-point add or subtract operation the significant of the two numbers must be aligned which requires shifting the smaller number to the right increasing its exponent until it matches the exponent of the larger number This is done by subtracting the exponents and using the barrel shifter to shift the smaller number to the right by the difference in one cycle If a simple shifter were used shifting by n bit positions would require n clock cycles

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 36 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 37 37 Mr Ravikant G B

  • The Digital Inverter or NOT gate
  • PROCEDURE
  • XOR Gate
  • The exclusive-OR (XOR) operator uses the symbol oplus and it performs the following logic operation
  • X oplus Y = X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y
  • The result is 1 only when either X is equal to 1 or Y is equal to 1 but not when both X and Y are equal to 1
  • XNOR Gate
  • The exclusive-NOR (XNOR) operator uses the symbol 1048703 and it performs the following logic operation
  • X 1048703Y = X Y + Xrsquo Yrsquo = (X oplus Y)rsquo
  • The result is 1 when either both X and Y are 0rsquos or when both are 1rsquos That is why this gate is often referred to as the Equivalence gate
  • The truth tables clearly show that the exclusive-NOR operation is the complement of the exclusive-OR
  • This can also be shown by algebraic manipulation as follows
  • (X oplus Y)rsquo = (X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y)rsquo
  • = (X Yrsquo)rsquo (Xrsquo Y)rsquo = (Xrsquo + Y) (X + Yrsquo)
  • = (XY + XrsquoYrsquo)
Page 7: vlsi manual

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

W-EDIT WAVEFORM (S) AFTER LAYOUT

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 7 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

LVS

1)Open LVS from the desktop2)Go to New-gtLVS Setup-gtAdd layout and schematic netlist which are spice files3)Perform Run Verification4)Check for the schematic and layout equality

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 8 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 2AIM Draw the circuits for nand and nor for specified length and width using schematic and for the same draw the layout

a) For the above verify the timing diagrams in both schematic and layoutb) Perform LVS for the same

S-EDIT PROCEDURE

T-SPICE FILE

W-EDIT FILE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 9 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

L-Edit Procedure1) Construct the layout as shown below

2)Set up extraction and extract the spice output3)Add all the required simulation commands and check for the waveforms These waveforms should match the Schematic waveforms4) Perform the LVS to check whether schematic and layouts are same Similarly perform an experiment for NOR functionality as well

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 10 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

SchematicLayout

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 11 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 3AIM Draw the circuits for XOR and XNOR for specified length and width using schematic and for the same draw the layout

a) For the above verify the timing diagrams in both schematic and layoutb) Plot voltage vs time and input voltage vs output voltagec) Perform the LVS to check circuit and layout equality

Theory XOR Gate The exclusive-OR (XOR) operator uses the symbol and it performs the following logic oplusoperation X oplus Y = X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y The graphic symbol and truth table of XOR gate is shown in the figure

The result is 1 only when either X is equal to 1 or Y is equal to 1 but not when both X and Y are equal to 1

XNOR Gate The exclusive-NOR (XNOR) operator uses the symbol 1048703 and it performs the following logic operation X 10487031048703Y = X Y + Xrsquo Yrsquo = (X oplus Y)rsquo The graphic symbol and truth table of XNOR (Equivalence) gate is shown in the figure

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 12 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

The result is 1 when either both X and Y are 0rsquos or when both are 1rsquos That is why this gate is often referred to as the Equivalence gate The truth tables clearly show that the exclusive-NOR operation is the complement of the exclusive-OR This can also be shown by algebraic manipulation as follows (X Y)rsquo = (X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y)rsquo oplus

= (X Yrsquo)rsquo (Xrsquo Y)rsquo = (Xrsquo + Y) (X + Yrsquo) = (XY + XrsquoYrsquo)

= X 10487031048703Y

The XOR gate can be constructed using MOSFETS as shown below

Schematic

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 13 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

T-Spice

Layout

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 14 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Spice Net list(Layout)

Waveforms

Perform the LVS for both schematic and layout

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 15 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Similarly perform an experiment for XNOR functionality as wellSchematic

Net List

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 16 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Layout

Simulations

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 17 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 4AIM Draw the circuits for AND gate and OR gate for specified length and width using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same draw the layout

a) For the above verify the timing diagrams in both schematic and layoutb) Plot voltage vs time and input voltage vs output voltagec) Perform the LVS to check circuit and layout equality

Procedure

And Gate1)Construct NAND gate and Inverter using the procedure mentioned before in s-edit using

MOSFETs2)Create a symbol for Nand and Inverter with the procedure below

Creating a Symbol 1)Construct a Nand Gate with MOSFETs as shown below2)Go to Cell in the tool bar and click on Update Symbol The symbol will be created Check for itrsquos

functionality in T-spice and save the s-edit project

3)Similarly construct the Inverter and update the symbol Check itrsquos functionality in T-spice and save the s-edit project

4)Open a new project to construct and gate Go to Add in the library Browser and add Nand and Inverter files which were constructed as shown below

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 18 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

5)Construct the And circuit with the symbols of Nand and inverter as shown below

6)Check the functionality in T-spice

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 19 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Waveforms in W-Edit

L-Edit

Note Add one inverter to the output of Nand gate Use poly contact while joining poly and metal

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 20 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

7)Similarly Construct Or gate using component instantiation in s-edit Verify itrsquos functionality using T-spiceBuild the layout by adding inverter to the output of the NOR gate

8)Perform the LVS for schematic and layout in both And gate as well as in Or gate to check the circuit equality in schematic and layout

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 21 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 5AIM Simplify the given expression and implement using the Universal (NAND) Logic Gates Use automatic place and Route for the layout

Ex 1) Y = ABrsquoCrsquo+ArsquoBrsquoCrsquo+ArsquoBCrsquo+ArsquoBrsquoC Simplify thisThis can be reduced to ArsquoBrsquo+BrsquoCrsquo+CrsquoArsquo

Procedure1 Construct the schematic for the above equation using only universal gates (Nand)2 Before implementing in schematic check the cell name and the port names of the logic

gates to be used in the circuit3 Steps for the (2)

a Open the L-Editor File-gtNew-gtbrowse for morbn20dtdb file(MyDocumentsmorbn20dmorbn20dtdb)

b Go to Cell-gtInstance-gtbrowse for morbn20d file (same path as above)Now go through the list of the library components Click the required cell and instantiate in the L-Editor From that instance note down the input and output port names And also note the cell name in the list

4 In schematic Editor ( this steps are only for the logic gates(ex Only for one nand gate)a File-gtNew Design-gtDesign Nameb Cell-gtNew Cell-gtcell name(same as the cell name in L-Editor library)c Draw the schematic and give the input and output names same as(3b)d Update the symbol Cell-gtUpdate symbole Go to properties window click on property icon(View-gtproperties)

and add the properties as shown in the below window

5 Implement the given expression in a New design instantiating the cell created in step (4) in S-Editor

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 22 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

6 Once the circuit is completed check for errors and simulation Export the design by using following stepsFiles-gtExport-gtExport TPR-gt Give the path (your design folder) to save the exported file in tpr format and click on Export

7 Go to L-Edit open New Design File-gtNew-gtbrowse for morbn20dtdb file(MyDocumentsmorbn20dmorbn20dtdb)

8 Click on Tools (from toolbar) -gt SPR -gt Place and Route9 A window will pop up Uncheck the last two options(Pad setup) Then click on Setup

from the same window Here browse for the technology file(morban20dext) and browse the path of the net list file ( tpr file path saved in step(6) ) Click on OK and then click on Run button

10 Layout will be generated automatically in the layout window for the designed circuit

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 23 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Example of the tpr file

C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_1 A A N_1C Nand3 A B C OutUNand3_1 N_6 N_5 N_4 OutC Nand2 A B OutUNand2_2 B B N_2C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_3 C C N_3C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_4 N_2 N_1 N_4C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_5 N_3 N_2 N_5C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_6 N_1 N_3 N_6

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 24 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 6AIM Draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor for

a) J K Flip flopb) J K Master Slave Flip flopc) D Flip flopd) T Flip flop

Verify the timing diagrams in schematic and generate the layout for the same using Place and route

Procedure

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 25 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Follow the same procedure given in the Experiment 5

Layout generated layout for the MSJKFF

Similarly implement for the DFF and TFF

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 26 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 7

AIM Design Serial and paralle adder and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

Circuit Diagram

ProcedureSame as in experiment 5

S-EDIT FILE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 27 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Generated Layout for the above circuit

Note Similar procedure is followed for the construction of parallel AdderThe schematic of parallel adder is as given below

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 28 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 8AIM Design 41 Mux and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematicImplement using universal gatesProcedureFollow the steps as in experiment 5S-Edit

Generated layout for the above circuit

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 29 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 9AIM Design of Asynchronous Synchronous Up-Down counters with minimum number of gates and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

DESIGN OF SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER

TRUTH TABLEQ3 Q2 Q1 Q0 Q3

+ Q2+ Q1

+ Q0+

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 1 0 0 1 00 0 1 0 0 0 1 10 0 1 1 0 1 0 00 1 0 0 0 1 0 10 1 0 1 0 1 1 00 1 1 0 0 1 1 10 1 1 1 1 0 0 01 0 0 0 1 0 0 11 0 0 1 1 0 1 01 0 1 0 1 0 1 11 0 1 1 1 1 0 01 1 0 0 1 1 0 11 1 0 1 1 1 1 01 1 1 0 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

Now using the karnaugh map we find the simplified expressions for Q3+ Q2

+ Q1+ Q0

+

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 30 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

PROCEDURE

1) In the first step for building the circuit for a synchronous counter design a D-FF using NAND2 NAND3 gates as shown below using component instantiation (create the cell name and port name same as in the morbon20(in L-edit))

2) Update the symbol

3) Add the DFF cell(symbol) in the library Instantiate DFF to build the Asynchronous counter Same way build the circuit for Synchronous counter along with required gates as per the above design

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 31 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Asynchronous Counter

Synchronous Counter

4) Check the working of the both COUNTERs and verify the truth table as per the usual procedure of T-SPICE and W-EDIT

W-EDIT FILE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 32 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

5) Export the schematic and generate the layout by TPR

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 33 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 10

AIM Design SERIAL REGISTER capable of holding and shifting 4 bit words and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

Circuit

A Simple Shift Register Consisting of D-type Flip-flops

PROCEDURE

1) Use the same DFF used in counters

2) Circuit diagram

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 34 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

3) Export the schematic and generate the layout by TPR

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 35 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 12

AIM Design a barrel shifter using nMOSFETs and draw the schematic in schematic editor Verify the timing diagrams in schematic for shift right operation

TheoryA barrel shifter is a digital circuit that can shift a data word by a specified number of bits in one clock cycle It can be implemented as a sequence of multiplexers (mux) and in such an implementation the output of one mux is connected to the input of the next mux in a way that depends on the shift distance

For example take a 4-bit barrel shifter with inputs A B C and D The shifter can cycle the order of the bits ABCD as DABC CDAB or BCDA in this case no bits are lost That is it can shift all of the outputs up to three positions to the right (and thus make any cyclic combination of A B C and D) The barrel shifter has a variety of applications including being a vital component in microprocessors (alongside the ALU)

A common usage of a barrel shifter is in the hardware implementation of floating-point arithmetic For a floating-point add or subtract operation the significant of the two numbers must be aligned which requires shifting the smaller number to the right increasing its exponent until it matches the exponent of the larger number This is done by subtracting the exponents and using the barrel shifter to shift the smaller number to the right by the difference in one cycle If a simple shifter were used shifting by n bit positions would require n clock cycles

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 36 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 37 37 Mr Ravikant G B

  • The Digital Inverter or NOT gate
  • PROCEDURE
  • XOR Gate
  • The exclusive-OR (XOR) operator uses the symbol oplus and it performs the following logic operation
  • X oplus Y = X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y
  • The result is 1 only when either X is equal to 1 or Y is equal to 1 but not when both X and Y are equal to 1
  • XNOR Gate
  • The exclusive-NOR (XNOR) operator uses the symbol 1048703 and it performs the following logic operation
  • X 1048703Y = X Y + Xrsquo Yrsquo = (X oplus Y)rsquo
  • The result is 1 when either both X and Y are 0rsquos or when both are 1rsquos That is why this gate is often referred to as the Equivalence gate
  • The truth tables clearly show that the exclusive-NOR operation is the complement of the exclusive-OR
  • This can also be shown by algebraic manipulation as follows
  • (X oplus Y)rsquo = (X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y)rsquo
  • = (X Yrsquo)rsquo (Xrsquo Y)rsquo = (Xrsquo + Y) (X + Yrsquo)
  • = (XY + XrsquoYrsquo)
Page 8: vlsi manual

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

LVS

1)Open LVS from the desktop2)Go to New-gtLVS Setup-gtAdd layout and schematic netlist which are spice files3)Perform Run Verification4)Check for the schematic and layout equality

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 8 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 2AIM Draw the circuits for nand and nor for specified length and width using schematic and for the same draw the layout

a) For the above verify the timing diagrams in both schematic and layoutb) Perform LVS for the same

S-EDIT PROCEDURE

T-SPICE FILE

W-EDIT FILE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 9 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

L-Edit Procedure1) Construct the layout as shown below

2)Set up extraction and extract the spice output3)Add all the required simulation commands and check for the waveforms These waveforms should match the Schematic waveforms4) Perform the LVS to check whether schematic and layouts are same Similarly perform an experiment for NOR functionality as well

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 10 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

SchematicLayout

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 11 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 3AIM Draw the circuits for XOR and XNOR for specified length and width using schematic and for the same draw the layout

a) For the above verify the timing diagrams in both schematic and layoutb) Plot voltage vs time and input voltage vs output voltagec) Perform the LVS to check circuit and layout equality

Theory XOR Gate The exclusive-OR (XOR) operator uses the symbol and it performs the following logic oplusoperation X oplus Y = X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y The graphic symbol and truth table of XOR gate is shown in the figure

The result is 1 only when either X is equal to 1 or Y is equal to 1 but not when both X and Y are equal to 1

XNOR Gate The exclusive-NOR (XNOR) operator uses the symbol 1048703 and it performs the following logic operation X 10487031048703Y = X Y + Xrsquo Yrsquo = (X oplus Y)rsquo The graphic symbol and truth table of XNOR (Equivalence) gate is shown in the figure

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 12 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

The result is 1 when either both X and Y are 0rsquos or when both are 1rsquos That is why this gate is often referred to as the Equivalence gate The truth tables clearly show that the exclusive-NOR operation is the complement of the exclusive-OR This can also be shown by algebraic manipulation as follows (X Y)rsquo = (X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y)rsquo oplus

= (X Yrsquo)rsquo (Xrsquo Y)rsquo = (Xrsquo + Y) (X + Yrsquo) = (XY + XrsquoYrsquo)

= X 10487031048703Y

The XOR gate can be constructed using MOSFETS as shown below

Schematic

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 13 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

T-Spice

Layout

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 14 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Spice Net list(Layout)

Waveforms

Perform the LVS for both schematic and layout

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 15 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Similarly perform an experiment for XNOR functionality as wellSchematic

Net List

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 16 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Layout

Simulations

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 17 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 4AIM Draw the circuits for AND gate and OR gate for specified length and width using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same draw the layout

a) For the above verify the timing diagrams in both schematic and layoutb) Plot voltage vs time and input voltage vs output voltagec) Perform the LVS to check circuit and layout equality

Procedure

And Gate1)Construct NAND gate and Inverter using the procedure mentioned before in s-edit using

MOSFETs2)Create a symbol for Nand and Inverter with the procedure below

Creating a Symbol 1)Construct a Nand Gate with MOSFETs as shown below2)Go to Cell in the tool bar and click on Update Symbol The symbol will be created Check for itrsquos

functionality in T-spice and save the s-edit project

3)Similarly construct the Inverter and update the symbol Check itrsquos functionality in T-spice and save the s-edit project

4)Open a new project to construct and gate Go to Add in the library Browser and add Nand and Inverter files which were constructed as shown below

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 18 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

5)Construct the And circuit with the symbols of Nand and inverter as shown below

6)Check the functionality in T-spice

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 19 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Waveforms in W-Edit

L-Edit

Note Add one inverter to the output of Nand gate Use poly contact while joining poly and metal

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 20 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

7)Similarly Construct Or gate using component instantiation in s-edit Verify itrsquos functionality using T-spiceBuild the layout by adding inverter to the output of the NOR gate

8)Perform the LVS for schematic and layout in both And gate as well as in Or gate to check the circuit equality in schematic and layout

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 21 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 5AIM Simplify the given expression and implement using the Universal (NAND) Logic Gates Use automatic place and Route for the layout

Ex 1) Y = ABrsquoCrsquo+ArsquoBrsquoCrsquo+ArsquoBCrsquo+ArsquoBrsquoC Simplify thisThis can be reduced to ArsquoBrsquo+BrsquoCrsquo+CrsquoArsquo

Procedure1 Construct the schematic for the above equation using only universal gates (Nand)2 Before implementing in schematic check the cell name and the port names of the logic

gates to be used in the circuit3 Steps for the (2)

a Open the L-Editor File-gtNew-gtbrowse for morbn20dtdb file(MyDocumentsmorbn20dmorbn20dtdb)

b Go to Cell-gtInstance-gtbrowse for morbn20d file (same path as above)Now go through the list of the library components Click the required cell and instantiate in the L-Editor From that instance note down the input and output port names And also note the cell name in the list

4 In schematic Editor ( this steps are only for the logic gates(ex Only for one nand gate)a File-gtNew Design-gtDesign Nameb Cell-gtNew Cell-gtcell name(same as the cell name in L-Editor library)c Draw the schematic and give the input and output names same as(3b)d Update the symbol Cell-gtUpdate symbole Go to properties window click on property icon(View-gtproperties)

and add the properties as shown in the below window

5 Implement the given expression in a New design instantiating the cell created in step (4) in S-Editor

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 22 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

6 Once the circuit is completed check for errors and simulation Export the design by using following stepsFiles-gtExport-gtExport TPR-gt Give the path (your design folder) to save the exported file in tpr format and click on Export

7 Go to L-Edit open New Design File-gtNew-gtbrowse for morbn20dtdb file(MyDocumentsmorbn20dmorbn20dtdb)

8 Click on Tools (from toolbar) -gt SPR -gt Place and Route9 A window will pop up Uncheck the last two options(Pad setup) Then click on Setup

from the same window Here browse for the technology file(morban20dext) and browse the path of the net list file ( tpr file path saved in step(6) ) Click on OK and then click on Run button

10 Layout will be generated automatically in the layout window for the designed circuit

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 23 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Example of the tpr file

C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_1 A A N_1C Nand3 A B C OutUNand3_1 N_6 N_5 N_4 OutC Nand2 A B OutUNand2_2 B B N_2C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_3 C C N_3C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_4 N_2 N_1 N_4C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_5 N_3 N_2 N_5C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_6 N_1 N_3 N_6

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 24 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 6AIM Draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor for

a) J K Flip flopb) J K Master Slave Flip flopc) D Flip flopd) T Flip flop

Verify the timing diagrams in schematic and generate the layout for the same using Place and route

Procedure

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 25 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Follow the same procedure given in the Experiment 5

Layout generated layout for the MSJKFF

Similarly implement for the DFF and TFF

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 26 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 7

AIM Design Serial and paralle adder and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

Circuit Diagram

ProcedureSame as in experiment 5

S-EDIT FILE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 27 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Generated Layout for the above circuit

Note Similar procedure is followed for the construction of parallel AdderThe schematic of parallel adder is as given below

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 28 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 8AIM Design 41 Mux and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematicImplement using universal gatesProcedureFollow the steps as in experiment 5S-Edit

Generated layout for the above circuit

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 29 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 9AIM Design of Asynchronous Synchronous Up-Down counters with minimum number of gates and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

DESIGN OF SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER

TRUTH TABLEQ3 Q2 Q1 Q0 Q3

+ Q2+ Q1

+ Q0+

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 1 0 0 1 00 0 1 0 0 0 1 10 0 1 1 0 1 0 00 1 0 0 0 1 0 10 1 0 1 0 1 1 00 1 1 0 0 1 1 10 1 1 1 1 0 0 01 0 0 0 1 0 0 11 0 0 1 1 0 1 01 0 1 0 1 0 1 11 0 1 1 1 1 0 01 1 0 0 1 1 0 11 1 0 1 1 1 1 01 1 1 0 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

Now using the karnaugh map we find the simplified expressions for Q3+ Q2

+ Q1+ Q0

+

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 30 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

PROCEDURE

1) In the first step for building the circuit for a synchronous counter design a D-FF using NAND2 NAND3 gates as shown below using component instantiation (create the cell name and port name same as in the morbon20(in L-edit))

2) Update the symbol

3) Add the DFF cell(symbol) in the library Instantiate DFF to build the Asynchronous counter Same way build the circuit for Synchronous counter along with required gates as per the above design

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 31 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Asynchronous Counter

Synchronous Counter

4) Check the working of the both COUNTERs and verify the truth table as per the usual procedure of T-SPICE and W-EDIT

W-EDIT FILE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 32 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

5) Export the schematic and generate the layout by TPR

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 33 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 10

AIM Design SERIAL REGISTER capable of holding and shifting 4 bit words and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

Circuit

A Simple Shift Register Consisting of D-type Flip-flops

PROCEDURE

1) Use the same DFF used in counters

2) Circuit diagram

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 34 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

3) Export the schematic and generate the layout by TPR

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 35 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 12

AIM Design a barrel shifter using nMOSFETs and draw the schematic in schematic editor Verify the timing diagrams in schematic for shift right operation

TheoryA barrel shifter is a digital circuit that can shift a data word by a specified number of bits in one clock cycle It can be implemented as a sequence of multiplexers (mux) and in such an implementation the output of one mux is connected to the input of the next mux in a way that depends on the shift distance

For example take a 4-bit barrel shifter with inputs A B C and D The shifter can cycle the order of the bits ABCD as DABC CDAB or BCDA in this case no bits are lost That is it can shift all of the outputs up to three positions to the right (and thus make any cyclic combination of A B C and D) The barrel shifter has a variety of applications including being a vital component in microprocessors (alongside the ALU)

A common usage of a barrel shifter is in the hardware implementation of floating-point arithmetic For a floating-point add or subtract operation the significant of the two numbers must be aligned which requires shifting the smaller number to the right increasing its exponent until it matches the exponent of the larger number This is done by subtracting the exponents and using the barrel shifter to shift the smaller number to the right by the difference in one cycle If a simple shifter were used shifting by n bit positions would require n clock cycles

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 36 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 37 37 Mr Ravikant G B

  • The Digital Inverter or NOT gate
  • PROCEDURE
  • XOR Gate
  • The exclusive-OR (XOR) operator uses the symbol oplus and it performs the following logic operation
  • X oplus Y = X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y
  • The result is 1 only when either X is equal to 1 or Y is equal to 1 but not when both X and Y are equal to 1
  • XNOR Gate
  • The exclusive-NOR (XNOR) operator uses the symbol 1048703 and it performs the following logic operation
  • X 1048703Y = X Y + Xrsquo Yrsquo = (X oplus Y)rsquo
  • The result is 1 when either both X and Y are 0rsquos or when both are 1rsquos That is why this gate is often referred to as the Equivalence gate
  • The truth tables clearly show that the exclusive-NOR operation is the complement of the exclusive-OR
  • This can also be shown by algebraic manipulation as follows
  • (X oplus Y)rsquo = (X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y)rsquo
  • = (X Yrsquo)rsquo (Xrsquo Y)rsquo = (Xrsquo + Y) (X + Yrsquo)
  • = (XY + XrsquoYrsquo)
Page 9: vlsi manual

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 2AIM Draw the circuits for nand and nor for specified length and width using schematic and for the same draw the layout

a) For the above verify the timing diagrams in both schematic and layoutb) Perform LVS for the same

S-EDIT PROCEDURE

T-SPICE FILE

W-EDIT FILE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 9 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

L-Edit Procedure1) Construct the layout as shown below

2)Set up extraction and extract the spice output3)Add all the required simulation commands and check for the waveforms These waveforms should match the Schematic waveforms4) Perform the LVS to check whether schematic and layouts are same Similarly perform an experiment for NOR functionality as well

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 10 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

SchematicLayout

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 11 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 3AIM Draw the circuits for XOR and XNOR for specified length and width using schematic and for the same draw the layout

a) For the above verify the timing diagrams in both schematic and layoutb) Plot voltage vs time and input voltage vs output voltagec) Perform the LVS to check circuit and layout equality

Theory XOR Gate The exclusive-OR (XOR) operator uses the symbol and it performs the following logic oplusoperation X oplus Y = X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y The graphic symbol and truth table of XOR gate is shown in the figure

The result is 1 only when either X is equal to 1 or Y is equal to 1 but not when both X and Y are equal to 1

XNOR Gate The exclusive-NOR (XNOR) operator uses the symbol 1048703 and it performs the following logic operation X 10487031048703Y = X Y + Xrsquo Yrsquo = (X oplus Y)rsquo The graphic symbol and truth table of XNOR (Equivalence) gate is shown in the figure

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 12 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

The result is 1 when either both X and Y are 0rsquos or when both are 1rsquos That is why this gate is often referred to as the Equivalence gate The truth tables clearly show that the exclusive-NOR operation is the complement of the exclusive-OR This can also be shown by algebraic manipulation as follows (X Y)rsquo = (X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y)rsquo oplus

= (X Yrsquo)rsquo (Xrsquo Y)rsquo = (Xrsquo + Y) (X + Yrsquo) = (XY + XrsquoYrsquo)

= X 10487031048703Y

The XOR gate can be constructed using MOSFETS as shown below

Schematic

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 13 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

T-Spice

Layout

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 14 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Spice Net list(Layout)

Waveforms

Perform the LVS for both schematic and layout

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 15 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Similarly perform an experiment for XNOR functionality as wellSchematic

Net List

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 16 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Layout

Simulations

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 17 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 4AIM Draw the circuits for AND gate and OR gate for specified length and width using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same draw the layout

a) For the above verify the timing diagrams in both schematic and layoutb) Plot voltage vs time and input voltage vs output voltagec) Perform the LVS to check circuit and layout equality

Procedure

And Gate1)Construct NAND gate and Inverter using the procedure mentioned before in s-edit using

MOSFETs2)Create a symbol for Nand and Inverter with the procedure below

Creating a Symbol 1)Construct a Nand Gate with MOSFETs as shown below2)Go to Cell in the tool bar and click on Update Symbol The symbol will be created Check for itrsquos

functionality in T-spice and save the s-edit project

3)Similarly construct the Inverter and update the symbol Check itrsquos functionality in T-spice and save the s-edit project

4)Open a new project to construct and gate Go to Add in the library Browser and add Nand and Inverter files which were constructed as shown below

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 18 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

5)Construct the And circuit with the symbols of Nand and inverter as shown below

6)Check the functionality in T-spice

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 19 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Waveforms in W-Edit

L-Edit

Note Add one inverter to the output of Nand gate Use poly contact while joining poly and metal

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 20 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

7)Similarly Construct Or gate using component instantiation in s-edit Verify itrsquos functionality using T-spiceBuild the layout by adding inverter to the output of the NOR gate

8)Perform the LVS for schematic and layout in both And gate as well as in Or gate to check the circuit equality in schematic and layout

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 21 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 5AIM Simplify the given expression and implement using the Universal (NAND) Logic Gates Use automatic place and Route for the layout

Ex 1) Y = ABrsquoCrsquo+ArsquoBrsquoCrsquo+ArsquoBCrsquo+ArsquoBrsquoC Simplify thisThis can be reduced to ArsquoBrsquo+BrsquoCrsquo+CrsquoArsquo

Procedure1 Construct the schematic for the above equation using only universal gates (Nand)2 Before implementing in schematic check the cell name and the port names of the logic

gates to be used in the circuit3 Steps for the (2)

a Open the L-Editor File-gtNew-gtbrowse for morbn20dtdb file(MyDocumentsmorbn20dmorbn20dtdb)

b Go to Cell-gtInstance-gtbrowse for morbn20d file (same path as above)Now go through the list of the library components Click the required cell and instantiate in the L-Editor From that instance note down the input and output port names And also note the cell name in the list

4 In schematic Editor ( this steps are only for the logic gates(ex Only for one nand gate)a File-gtNew Design-gtDesign Nameb Cell-gtNew Cell-gtcell name(same as the cell name in L-Editor library)c Draw the schematic and give the input and output names same as(3b)d Update the symbol Cell-gtUpdate symbole Go to properties window click on property icon(View-gtproperties)

and add the properties as shown in the below window

5 Implement the given expression in a New design instantiating the cell created in step (4) in S-Editor

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 22 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

6 Once the circuit is completed check for errors and simulation Export the design by using following stepsFiles-gtExport-gtExport TPR-gt Give the path (your design folder) to save the exported file in tpr format and click on Export

7 Go to L-Edit open New Design File-gtNew-gtbrowse for morbn20dtdb file(MyDocumentsmorbn20dmorbn20dtdb)

8 Click on Tools (from toolbar) -gt SPR -gt Place and Route9 A window will pop up Uncheck the last two options(Pad setup) Then click on Setup

from the same window Here browse for the technology file(morban20dext) and browse the path of the net list file ( tpr file path saved in step(6) ) Click on OK and then click on Run button

10 Layout will be generated automatically in the layout window for the designed circuit

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 23 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Example of the tpr file

C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_1 A A N_1C Nand3 A B C OutUNand3_1 N_6 N_5 N_4 OutC Nand2 A B OutUNand2_2 B B N_2C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_3 C C N_3C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_4 N_2 N_1 N_4C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_5 N_3 N_2 N_5C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_6 N_1 N_3 N_6

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 24 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 6AIM Draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor for

a) J K Flip flopb) J K Master Slave Flip flopc) D Flip flopd) T Flip flop

Verify the timing diagrams in schematic and generate the layout for the same using Place and route

Procedure

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 25 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Follow the same procedure given in the Experiment 5

Layout generated layout for the MSJKFF

Similarly implement for the DFF and TFF

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 26 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 7

AIM Design Serial and paralle adder and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

Circuit Diagram

ProcedureSame as in experiment 5

S-EDIT FILE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 27 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Generated Layout for the above circuit

Note Similar procedure is followed for the construction of parallel AdderThe schematic of parallel adder is as given below

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 28 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 8AIM Design 41 Mux and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematicImplement using universal gatesProcedureFollow the steps as in experiment 5S-Edit

Generated layout for the above circuit

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 29 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 9AIM Design of Asynchronous Synchronous Up-Down counters with minimum number of gates and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

DESIGN OF SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER

TRUTH TABLEQ3 Q2 Q1 Q0 Q3

+ Q2+ Q1

+ Q0+

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 1 0 0 1 00 0 1 0 0 0 1 10 0 1 1 0 1 0 00 1 0 0 0 1 0 10 1 0 1 0 1 1 00 1 1 0 0 1 1 10 1 1 1 1 0 0 01 0 0 0 1 0 0 11 0 0 1 1 0 1 01 0 1 0 1 0 1 11 0 1 1 1 1 0 01 1 0 0 1 1 0 11 1 0 1 1 1 1 01 1 1 0 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

Now using the karnaugh map we find the simplified expressions for Q3+ Q2

+ Q1+ Q0

+

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 30 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

PROCEDURE

1) In the first step for building the circuit for a synchronous counter design a D-FF using NAND2 NAND3 gates as shown below using component instantiation (create the cell name and port name same as in the morbon20(in L-edit))

2) Update the symbol

3) Add the DFF cell(symbol) in the library Instantiate DFF to build the Asynchronous counter Same way build the circuit for Synchronous counter along with required gates as per the above design

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 31 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Asynchronous Counter

Synchronous Counter

4) Check the working of the both COUNTERs and verify the truth table as per the usual procedure of T-SPICE and W-EDIT

W-EDIT FILE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 32 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

5) Export the schematic and generate the layout by TPR

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 33 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 10

AIM Design SERIAL REGISTER capable of holding and shifting 4 bit words and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

Circuit

A Simple Shift Register Consisting of D-type Flip-flops

PROCEDURE

1) Use the same DFF used in counters

2) Circuit diagram

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 34 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

3) Export the schematic and generate the layout by TPR

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 35 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 12

AIM Design a barrel shifter using nMOSFETs and draw the schematic in schematic editor Verify the timing diagrams in schematic for shift right operation

TheoryA barrel shifter is a digital circuit that can shift a data word by a specified number of bits in one clock cycle It can be implemented as a sequence of multiplexers (mux) and in such an implementation the output of one mux is connected to the input of the next mux in a way that depends on the shift distance

For example take a 4-bit barrel shifter with inputs A B C and D The shifter can cycle the order of the bits ABCD as DABC CDAB or BCDA in this case no bits are lost That is it can shift all of the outputs up to three positions to the right (and thus make any cyclic combination of A B C and D) The barrel shifter has a variety of applications including being a vital component in microprocessors (alongside the ALU)

A common usage of a barrel shifter is in the hardware implementation of floating-point arithmetic For a floating-point add or subtract operation the significant of the two numbers must be aligned which requires shifting the smaller number to the right increasing its exponent until it matches the exponent of the larger number This is done by subtracting the exponents and using the barrel shifter to shift the smaller number to the right by the difference in one cycle If a simple shifter were used shifting by n bit positions would require n clock cycles

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 36 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 37 37 Mr Ravikant G B

  • The Digital Inverter or NOT gate
  • PROCEDURE
  • XOR Gate
  • The exclusive-OR (XOR) operator uses the symbol oplus and it performs the following logic operation
  • X oplus Y = X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y
  • The result is 1 only when either X is equal to 1 or Y is equal to 1 but not when both X and Y are equal to 1
  • XNOR Gate
  • The exclusive-NOR (XNOR) operator uses the symbol 1048703 and it performs the following logic operation
  • X 1048703Y = X Y + Xrsquo Yrsquo = (X oplus Y)rsquo
  • The result is 1 when either both X and Y are 0rsquos or when both are 1rsquos That is why this gate is often referred to as the Equivalence gate
  • The truth tables clearly show that the exclusive-NOR operation is the complement of the exclusive-OR
  • This can also be shown by algebraic manipulation as follows
  • (X oplus Y)rsquo = (X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y)rsquo
  • = (X Yrsquo)rsquo (Xrsquo Y)rsquo = (Xrsquo + Y) (X + Yrsquo)
  • = (XY + XrsquoYrsquo)
Page 10: vlsi manual

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

L-Edit Procedure1) Construct the layout as shown below

2)Set up extraction and extract the spice output3)Add all the required simulation commands and check for the waveforms These waveforms should match the Schematic waveforms4) Perform the LVS to check whether schematic and layouts are same Similarly perform an experiment for NOR functionality as well

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 10 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

SchematicLayout

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 11 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 3AIM Draw the circuits for XOR and XNOR for specified length and width using schematic and for the same draw the layout

a) For the above verify the timing diagrams in both schematic and layoutb) Plot voltage vs time and input voltage vs output voltagec) Perform the LVS to check circuit and layout equality

Theory XOR Gate The exclusive-OR (XOR) operator uses the symbol and it performs the following logic oplusoperation X oplus Y = X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y The graphic symbol and truth table of XOR gate is shown in the figure

The result is 1 only when either X is equal to 1 or Y is equal to 1 but not when both X and Y are equal to 1

XNOR Gate The exclusive-NOR (XNOR) operator uses the symbol 1048703 and it performs the following logic operation X 10487031048703Y = X Y + Xrsquo Yrsquo = (X oplus Y)rsquo The graphic symbol and truth table of XNOR (Equivalence) gate is shown in the figure

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 12 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

The result is 1 when either both X and Y are 0rsquos or when both are 1rsquos That is why this gate is often referred to as the Equivalence gate The truth tables clearly show that the exclusive-NOR operation is the complement of the exclusive-OR This can also be shown by algebraic manipulation as follows (X Y)rsquo = (X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y)rsquo oplus

= (X Yrsquo)rsquo (Xrsquo Y)rsquo = (Xrsquo + Y) (X + Yrsquo) = (XY + XrsquoYrsquo)

= X 10487031048703Y

The XOR gate can be constructed using MOSFETS as shown below

Schematic

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 13 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

T-Spice

Layout

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 14 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Spice Net list(Layout)

Waveforms

Perform the LVS for both schematic and layout

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 15 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Similarly perform an experiment for XNOR functionality as wellSchematic

Net List

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 16 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Layout

Simulations

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 17 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 4AIM Draw the circuits for AND gate and OR gate for specified length and width using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same draw the layout

a) For the above verify the timing diagrams in both schematic and layoutb) Plot voltage vs time and input voltage vs output voltagec) Perform the LVS to check circuit and layout equality

Procedure

And Gate1)Construct NAND gate and Inverter using the procedure mentioned before in s-edit using

MOSFETs2)Create a symbol for Nand and Inverter with the procedure below

Creating a Symbol 1)Construct a Nand Gate with MOSFETs as shown below2)Go to Cell in the tool bar and click on Update Symbol The symbol will be created Check for itrsquos

functionality in T-spice and save the s-edit project

3)Similarly construct the Inverter and update the symbol Check itrsquos functionality in T-spice and save the s-edit project

4)Open a new project to construct and gate Go to Add in the library Browser and add Nand and Inverter files which were constructed as shown below

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 18 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

5)Construct the And circuit with the symbols of Nand and inverter as shown below

6)Check the functionality in T-spice

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 19 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Waveforms in W-Edit

L-Edit

Note Add one inverter to the output of Nand gate Use poly contact while joining poly and metal

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 20 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

7)Similarly Construct Or gate using component instantiation in s-edit Verify itrsquos functionality using T-spiceBuild the layout by adding inverter to the output of the NOR gate

8)Perform the LVS for schematic and layout in both And gate as well as in Or gate to check the circuit equality in schematic and layout

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 21 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 5AIM Simplify the given expression and implement using the Universal (NAND) Logic Gates Use automatic place and Route for the layout

Ex 1) Y = ABrsquoCrsquo+ArsquoBrsquoCrsquo+ArsquoBCrsquo+ArsquoBrsquoC Simplify thisThis can be reduced to ArsquoBrsquo+BrsquoCrsquo+CrsquoArsquo

Procedure1 Construct the schematic for the above equation using only universal gates (Nand)2 Before implementing in schematic check the cell name and the port names of the logic

gates to be used in the circuit3 Steps for the (2)

a Open the L-Editor File-gtNew-gtbrowse for morbn20dtdb file(MyDocumentsmorbn20dmorbn20dtdb)

b Go to Cell-gtInstance-gtbrowse for morbn20d file (same path as above)Now go through the list of the library components Click the required cell and instantiate in the L-Editor From that instance note down the input and output port names And also note the cell name in the list

4 In schematic Editor ( this steps are only for the logic gates(ex Only for one nand gate)a File-gtNew Design-gtDesign Nameb Cell-gtNew Cell-gtcell name(same as the cell name in L-Editor library)c Draw the schematic and give the input and output names same as(3b)d Update the symbol Cell-gtUpdate symbole Go to properties window click on property icon(View-gtproperties)

and add the properties as shown in the below window

5 Implement the given expression in a New design instantiating the cell created in step (4) in S-Editor

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 22 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

6 Once the circuit is completed check for errors and simulation Export the design by using following stepsFiles-gtExport-gtExport TPR-gt Give the path (your design folder) to save the exported file in tpr format and click on Export

7 Go to L-Edit open New Design File-gtNew-gtbrowse for morbn20dtdb file(MyDocumentsmorbn20dmorbn20dtdb)

8 Click on Tools (from toolbar) -gt SPR -gt Place and Route9 A window will pop up Uncheck the last two options(Pad setup) Then click on Setup

from the same window Here browse for the technology file(morban20dext) and browse the path of the net list file ( tpr file path saved in step(6) ) Click on OK and then click on Run button

10 Layout will be generated automatically in the layout window for the designed circuit

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 23 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Example of the tpr file

C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_1 A A N_1C Nand3 A B C OutUNand3_1 N_6 N_5 N_4 OutC Nand2 A B OutUNand2_2 B B N_2C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_3 C C N_3C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_4 N_2 N_1 N_4C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_5 N_3 N_2 N_5C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_6 N_1 N_3 N_6

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 24 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 6AIM Draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor for

a) J K Flip flopb) J K Master Slave Flip flopc) D Flip flopd) T Flip flop

Verify the timing diagrams in schematic and generate the layout for the same using Place and route

Procedure

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 25 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Follow the same procedure given in the Experiment 5

Layout generated layout for the MSJKFF

Similarly implement for the DFF and TFF

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 26 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 7

AIM Design Serial and paralle adder and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

Circuit Diagram

ProcedureSame as in experiment 5

S-EDIT FILE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 27 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Generated Layout for the above circuit

Note Similar procedure is followed for the construction of parallel AdderThe schematic of parallel adder is as given below

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 28 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 8AIM Design 41 Mux and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematicImplement using universal gatesProcedureFollow the steps as in experiment 5S-Edit

Generated layout for the above circuit

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 29 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 9AIM Design of Asynchronous Synchronous Up-Down counters with minimum number of gates and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

DESIGN OF SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER

TRUTH TABLEQ3 Q2 Q1 Q0 Q3

+ Q2+ Q1

+ Q0+

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 1 0 0 1 00 0 1 0 0 0 1 10 0 1 1 0 1 0 00 1 0 0 0 1 0 10 1 0 1 0 1 1 00 1 1 0 0 1 1 10 1 1 1 1 0 0 01 0 0 0 1 0 0 11 0 0 1 1 0 1 01 0 1 0 1 0 1 11 0 1 1 1 1 0 01 1 0 0 1 1 0 11 1 0 1 1 1 1 01 1 1 0 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

Now using the karnaugh map we find the simplified expressions for Q3+ Q2

+ Q1+ Q0

+

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 30 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

PROCEDURE

1) In the first step for building the circuit for a synchronous counter design a D-FF using NAND2 NAND3 gates as shown below using component instantiation (create the cell name and port name same as in the morbon20(in L-edit))

2) Update the symbol

3) Add the DFF cell(symbol) in the library Instantiate DFF to build the Asynchronous counter Same way build the circuit for Synchronous counter along with required gates as per the above design

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 31 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Asynchronous Counter

Synchronous Counter

4) Check the working of the both COUNTERs and verify the truth table as per the usual procedure of T-SPICE and W-EDIT

W-EDIT FILE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 32 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

5) Export the schematic and generate the layout by TPR

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 33 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 10

AIM Design SERIAL REGISTER capable of holding and shifting 4 bit words and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

Circuit

A Simple Shift Register Consisting of D-type Flip-flops

PROCEDURE

1) Use the same DFF used in counters

2) Circuit diagram

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 34 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

3) Export the schematic and generate the layout by TPR

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 35 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 12

AIM Design a barrel shifter using nMOSFETs and draw the schematic in schematic editor Verify the timing diagrams in schematic for shift right operation

TheoryA barrel shifter is a digital circuit that can shift a data word by a specified number of bits in one clock cycle It can be implemented as a sequence of multiplexers (mux) and in such an implementation the output of one mux is connected to the input of the next mux in a way that depends on the shift distance

For example take a 4-bit barrel shifter with inputs A B C and D The shifter can cycle the order of the bits ABCD as DABC CDAB or BCDA in this case no bits are lost That is it can shift all of the outputs up to three positions to the right (and thus make any cyclic combination of A B C and D) The barrel shifter has a variety of applications including being a vital component in microprocessors (alongside the ALU)

A common usage of a barrel shifter is in the hardware implementation of floating-point arithmetic For a floating-point add or subtract operation the significant of the two numbers must be aligned which requires shifting the smaller number to the right increasing its exponent until it matches the exponent of the larger number This is done by subtracting the exponents and using the barrel shifter to shift the smaller number to the right by the difference in one cycle If a simple shifter were used shifting by n bit positions would require n clock cycles

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 36 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 37 37 Mr Ravikant G B

  • The Digital Inverter or NOT gate
  • PROCEDURE
  • XOR Gate
  • The exclusive-OR (XOR) operator uses the symbol oplus and it performs the following logic operation
  • X oplus Y = X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y
  • The result is 1 only when either X is equal to 1 or Y is equal to 1 but not when both X and Y are equal to 1
  • XNOR Gate
  • The exclusive-NOR (XNOR) operator uses the symbol 1048703 and it performs the following logic operation
  • X 1048703Y = X Y + Xrsquo Yrsquo = (X oplus Y)rsquo
  • The result is 1 when either both X and Y are 0rsquos or when both are 1rsquos That is why this gate is often referred to as the Equivalence gate
  • The truth tables clearly show that the exclusive-NOR operation is the complement of the exclusive-OR
  • This can also be shown by algebraic manipulation as follows
  • (X oplus Y)rsquo = (X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y)rsquo
  • = (X Yrsquo)rsquo (Xrsquo Y)rsquo = (Xrsquo + Y) (X + Yrsquo)
  • = (XY + XrsquoYrsquo)
Page 11: vlsi manual

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

SchematicLayout

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 11 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 3AIM Draw the circuits for XOR and XNOR for specified length and width using schematic and for the same draw the layout

a) For the above verify the timing diagrams in both schematic and layoutb) Plot voltage vs time and input voltage vs output voltagec) Perform the LVS to check circuit and layout equality

Theory XOR Gate The exclusive-OR (XOR) operator uses the symbol and it performs the following logic oplusoperation X oplus Y = X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y The graphic symbol and truth table of XOR gate is shown in the figure

The result is 1 only when either X is equal to 1 or Y is equal to 1 but not when both X and Y are equal to 1

XNOR Gate The exclusive-NOR (XNOR) operator uses the symbol 1048703 and it performs the following logic operation X 10487031048703Y = X Y + Xrsquo Yrsquo = (X oplus Y)rsquo The graphic symbol and truth table of XNOR (Equivalence) gate is shown in the figure

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 12 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

The result is 1 when either both X and Y are 0rsquos or when both are 1rsquos That is why this gate is often referred to as the Equivalence gate The truth tables clearly show that the exclusive-NOR operation is the complement of the exclusive-OR This can also be shown by algebraic manipulation as follows (X Y)rsquo = (X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y)rsquo oplus

= (X Yrsquo)rsquo (Xrsquo Y)rsquo = (Xrsquo + Y) (X + Yrsquo) = (XY + XrsquoYrsquo)

= X 10487031048703Y

The XOR gate can be constructed using MOSFETS as shown below

Schematic

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 13 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

T-Spice

Layout

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 14 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Spice Net list(Layout)

Waveforms

Perform the LVS for both schematic and layout

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 15 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Similarly perform an experiment for XNOR functionality as wellSchematic

Net List

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 16 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Layout

Simulations

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 17 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 4AIM Draw the circuits for AND gate and OR gate for specified length and width using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same draw the layout

a) For the above verify the timing diagrams in both schematic and layoutb) Plot voltage vs time and input voltage vs output voltagec) Perform the LVS to check circuit and layout equality

Procedure

And Gate1)Construct NAND gate and Inverter using the procedure mentioned before in s-edit using

MOSFETs2)Create a symbol for Nand and Inverter with the procedure below

Creating a Symbol 1)Construct a Nand Gate with MOSFETs as shown below2)Go to Cell in the tool bar and click on Update Symbol The symbol will be created Check for itrsquos

functionality in T-spice and save the s-edit project

3)Similarly construct the Inverter and update the symbol Check itrsquos functionality in T-spice and save the s-edit project

4)Open a new project to construct and gate Go to Add in the library Browser and add Nand and Inverter files which were constructed as shown below

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 18 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

5)Construct the And circuit with the symbols of Nand and inverter as shown below

6)Check the functionality in T-spice

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 19 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Waveforms in W-Edit

L-Edit

Note Add one inverter to the output of Nand gate Use poly contact while joining poly and metal

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 20 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

7)Similarly Construct Or gate using component instantiation in s-edit Verify itrsquos functionality using T-spiceBuild the layout by adding inverter to the output of the NOR gate

8)Perform the LVS for schematic and layout in both And gate as well as in Or gate to check the circuit equality in schematic and layout

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 21 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 5AIM Simplify the given expression and implement using the Universal (NAND) Logic Gates Use automatic place and Route for the layout

Ex 1) Y = ABrsquoCrsquo+ArsquoBrsquoCrsquo+ArsquoBCrsquo+ArsquoBrsquoC Simplify thisThis can be reduced to ArsquoBrsquo+BrsquoCrsquo+CrsquoArsquo

Procedure1 Construct the schematic for the above equation using only universal gates (Nand)2 Before implementing in schematic check the cell name and the port names of the logic

gates to be used in the circuit3 Steps for the (2)

a Open the L-Editor File-gtNew-gtbrowse for morbn20dtdb file(MyDocumentsmorbn20dmorbn20dtdb)

b Go to Cell-gtInstance-gtbrowse for morbn20d file (same path as above)Now go through the list of the library components Click the required cell and instantiate in the L-Editor From that instance note down the input and output port names And also note the cell name in the list

4 In schematic Editor ( this steps are only for the logic gates(ex Only for one nand gate)a File-gtNew Design-gtDesign Nameb Cell-gtNew Cell-gtcell name(same as the cell name in L-Editor library)c Draw the schematic and give the input and output names same as(3b)d Update the symbol Cell-gtUpdate symbole Go to properties window click on property icon(View-gtproperties)

and add the properties as shown in the below window

5 Implement the given expression in a New design instantiating the cell created in step (4) in S-Editor

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 22 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

6 Once the circuit is completed check for errors and simulation Export the design by using following stepsFiles-gtExport-gtExport TPR-gt Give the path (your design folder) to save the exported file in tpr format and click on Export

7 Go to L-Edit open New Design File-gtNew-gtbrowse for morbn20dtdb file(MyDocumentsmorbn20dmorbn20dtdb)

8 Click on Tools (from toolbar) -gt SPR -gt Place and Route9 A window will pop up Uncheck the last two options(Pad setup) Then click on Setup

from the same window Here browse for the technology file(morban20dext) and browse the path of the net list file ( tpr file path saved in step(6) ) Click on OK and then click on Run button

10 Layout will be generated automatically in the layout window for the designed circuit

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 23 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Example of the tpr file

C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_1 A A N_1C Nand3 A B C OutUNand3_1 N_6 N_5 N_4 OutC Nand2 A B OutUNand2_2 B B N_2C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_3 C C N_3C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_4 N_2 N_1 N_4C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_5 N_3 N_2 N_5C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_6 N_1 N_3 N_6

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 24 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 6AIM Draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor for

a) J K Flip flopb) J K Master Slave Flip flopc) D Flip flopd) T Flip flop

Verify the timing diagrams in schematic and generate the layout for the same using Place and route

Procedure

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 25 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Follow the same procedure given in the Experiment 5

Layout generated layout for the MSJKFF

Similarly implement for the DFF and TFF

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 26 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 7

AIM Design Serial and paralle adder and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

Circuit Diagram

ProcedureSame as in experiment 5

S-EDIT FILE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 27 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Generated Layout for the above circuit

Note Similar procedure is followed for the construction of parallel AdderThe schematic of parallel adder is as given below

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 28 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 8AIM Design 41 Mux and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematicImplement using universal gatesProcedureFollow the steps as in experiment 5S-Edit

Generated layout for the above circuit

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 29 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 9AIM Design of Asynchronous Synchronous Up-Down counters with minimum number of gates and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

DESIGN OF SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER

TRUTH TABLEQ3 Q2 Q1 Q0 Q3

+ Q2+ Q1

+ Q0+

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 1 0 0 1 00 0 1 0 0 0 1 10 0 1 1 0 1 0 00 1 0 0 0 1 0 10 1 0 1 0 1 1 00 1 1 0 0 1 1 10 1 1 1 1 0 0 01 0 0 0 1 0 0 11 0 0 1 1 0 1 01 0 1 0 1 0 1 11 0 1 1 1 1 0 01 1 0 0 1 1 0 11 1 0 1 1 1 1 01 1 1 0 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

Now using the karnaugh map we find the simplified expressions for Q3+ Q2

+ Q1+ Q0

+

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 30 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

PROCEDURE

1) In the first step for building the circuit for a synchronous counter design a D-FF using NAND2 NAND3 gates as shown below using component instantiation (create the cell name and port name same as in the morbon20(in L-edit))

2) Update the symbol

3) Add the DFF cell(symbol) in the library Instantiate DFF to build the Asynchronous counter Same way build the circuit for Synchronous counter along with required gates as per the above design

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 31 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Asynchronous Counter

Synchronous Counter

4) Check the working of the both COUNTERs and verify the truth table as per the usual procedure of T-SPICE and W-EDIT

W-EDIT FILE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 32 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

5) Export the schematic and generate the layout by TPR

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 33 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 10

AIM Design SERIAL REGISTER capable of holding and shifting 4 bit words and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

Circuit

A Simple Shift Register Consisting of D-type Flip-flops

PROCEDURE

1) Use the same DFF used in counters

2) Circuit diagram

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 34 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

3) Export the schematic and generate the layout by TPR

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 35 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 12

AIM Design a barrel shifter using nMOSFETs and draw the schematic in schematic editor Verify the timing diagrams in schematic for shift right operation

TheoryA barrel shifter is a digital circuit that can shift a data word by a specified number of bits in one clock cycle It can be implemented as a sequence of multiplexers (mux) and in such an implementation the output of one mux is connected to the input of the next mux in a way that depends on the shift distance

For example take a 4-bit barrel shifter with inputs A B C and D The shifter can cycle the order of the bits ABCD as DABC CDAB or BCDA in this case no bits are lost That is it can shift all of the outputs up to three positions to the right (and thus make any cyclic combination of A B C and D) The barrel shifter has a variety of applications including being a vital component in microprocessors (alongside the ALU)

A common usage of a barrel shifter is in the hardware implementation of floating-point arithmetic For a floating-point add or subtract operation the significant of the two numbers must be aligned which requires shifting the smaller number to the right increasing its exponent until it matches the exponent of the larger number This is done by subtracting the exponents and using the barrel shifter to shift the smaller number to the right by the difference in one cycle If a simple shifter were used shifting by n bit positions would require n clock cycles

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 36 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 37 37 Mr Ravikant G B

  • The Digital Inverter or NOT gate
  • PROCEDURE
  • XOR Gate
  • The exclusive-OR (XOR) operator uses the symbol oplus and it performs the following logic operation
  • X oplus Y = X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y
  • The result is 1 only when either X is equal to 1 or Y is equal to 1 but not when both X and Y are equal to 1
  • XNOR Gate
  • The exclusive-NOR (XNOR) operator uses the symbol 1048703 and it performs the following logic operation
  • X 1048703Y = X Y + Xrsquo Yrsquo = (X oplus Y)rsquo
  • The result is 1 when either both X and Y are 0rsquos or when both are 1rsquos That is why this gate is often referred to as the Equivalence gate
  • The truth tables clearly show that the exclusive-NOR operation is the complement of the exclusive-OR
  • This can also be shown by algebraic manipulation as follows
  • (X oplus Y)rsquo = (X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y)rsquo
  • = (X Yrsquo)rsquo (Xrsquo Y)rsquo = (Xrsquo + Y) (X + Yrsquo)
  • = (XY + XrsquoYrsquo)
Page 12: vlsi manual

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 3AIM Draw the circuits for XOR and XNOR for specified length and width using schematic and for the same draw the layout

a) For the above verify the timing diagrams in both schematic and layoutb) Plot voltage vs time and input voltage vs output voltagec) Perform the LVS to check circuit and layout equality

Theory XOR Gate The exclusive-OR (XOR) operator uses the symbol and it performs the following logic oplusoperation X oplus Y = X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y The graphic symbol and truth table of XOR gate is shown in the figure

The result is 1 only when either X is equal to 1 or Y is equal to 1 but not when both X and Y are equal to 1

XNOR Gate The exclusive-NOR (XNOR) operator uses the symbol 1048703 and it performs the following logic operation X 10487031048703Y = X Y + Xrsquo Yrsquo = (X oplus Y)rsquo The graphic symbol and truth table of XNOR (Equivalence) gate is shown in the figure

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 12 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

The result is 1 when either both X and Y are 0rsquos or when both are 1rsquos That is why this gate is often referred to as the Equivalence gate The truth tables clearly show that the exclusive-NOR operation is the complement of the exclusive-OR This can also be shown by algebraic manipulation as follows (X Y)rsquo = (X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y)rsquo oplus

= (X Yrsquo)rsquo (Xrsquo Y)rsquo = (Xrsquo + Y) (X + Yrsquo) = (XY + XrsquoYrsquo)

= X 10487031048703Y

The XOR gate can be constructed using MOSFETS as shown below

Schematic

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 13 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

T-Spice

Layout

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 14 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Spice Net list(Layout)

Waveforms

Perform the LVS for both schematic and layout

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 15 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Similarly perform an experiment for XNOR functionality as wellSchematic

Net List

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 16 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Layout

Simulations

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 17 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 4AIM Draw the circuits for AND gate and OR gate for specified length and width using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same draw the layout

a) For the above verify the timing diagrams in both schematic and layoutb) Plot voltage vs time and input voltage vs output voltagec) Perform the LVS to check circuit and layout equality

Procedure

And Gate1)Construct NAND gate and Inverter using the procedure mentioned before in s-edit using

MOSFETs2)Create a symbol for Nand and Inverter with the procedure below

Creating a Symbol 1)Construct a Nand Gate with MOSFETs as shown below2)Go to Cell in the tool bar and click on Update Symbol The symbol will be created Check for itrsquos

functionality in T-spice and save the s-edit project

3)Similarly construct the Inverter and update the symbol Check itrsquos functionality in T-spice and save the s-edit project

4)Open a new project to construct and gate Go to Add in the library Browser and add Nand and Inverter files which were constructed as shown below

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 18 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

5)Construct the And circuit with the symbols of Nand and inverter as shown below

6)Check the functionality in T-spice

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 19 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Waveforms in W-Edit

L-Edit

Note Add one inverter to the output of Nand gate Use poly contact while joining poly and metal

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 20 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

7)Similarly Construct Or gate using component instantiation in s-edit Verify itrsquos functionality using T-spiceBuild the layout by adding inverter to the output of the NOR gate

8)Perform the LVS for schematic and layout in both And gate as well as in Or gate to check the circuit equality in schematic and layout

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 21 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 5AIM Simplify the given expression and implement using the Universal (NAND) Logic Gates Use automatic place and Route for the layout

Ex 1) Y = ABrsquoCrsquo+ArsquoBrsquoCrsquo+ArsquoBCrsquo+ArsquoBrsquoC Simplify thisThis can be reduced to ArsquoBrsquo+BrsquoCrsquo+CrsquoArsquo

Procedure1 Construct the schematic for the above equation using only universal gates (Nand)2 Before implementing in schematic check the cell name and the port names of the logic

gates to be used in the circuit3 Steps for the (2)

a Open the L-Editor File-gtNew-gtbrowse for morbn20dtdb file(MyDocumentsmorbn20dmorbn20dtdb)

b Go to Cell-gtInstance-gtbrowse for morbn20d file (same path as above)Now go through the list of the library components Click the required cell and instantiate in the L-Editor From that instance note down the input and output port names And also note the cell name in the list

4 In schematic Editor ( this steps are only for the logic gates(ex Only for one nand gate)a File-gtNew Design-gtDesign Nameb Cell-gtNew Cell-gtcell name(same as the cell name in L-Editor library)c Draw the schematic and give the input and output names same as(3b)d Update the symbol Cell-gtUpdate symbole Go to properties window click on property icon(View-gtproperties)

and add the properties as shown in the below window

5 Implement the given expression in a New design instantiating the cell created in step (4) in S-Editor

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 22 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

6 Once the circuit is completed check for errors and simulation Export the design by using following stepsFiles-gtExport-gtExport TPR-gt Give the path (your design folder) to save the exported file in tpr format and click on Export

7 Go to L-Edit open New Design File-gtNew-gtbrowse for morbn20dtdb file(MyDocumentsmorbn20dmorbn20dtdb)

8 Click on Tools (from toolbar) -gt SPR -gt Place and Route9 A window will pop up Uncheck the last two options(Pad setup) Then click on Setup

from the same window Here browse for the technology file(morban20dext) and browse the path of the net list file ( tpr file path saved in step(6) ) Click on OK and then click on Run button

10 Layout will be generated automatically in the layout window for the designed circuit

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 23 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Example of the tpr file

C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_1 A A N_1C Nand3 A B C OutUNand3_1 N_6 N_5 N_4 OutC Nand2 A B OutUNand2_2 B B N_2C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_3 C C N_3C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_4 N_2 N_1 N_4C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_5 N_3 N_2 N_5C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_6 N_1 N_3 N_6

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 24 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 6AIM Draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor for

a) J K Flip flopb) J K Master Slave Flip flopc) D Flip flopd) T Flip flop

Verify the timing diagrams in schematic and generate the layout for the same using Place and route

Procedure

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 25 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Follow the same procedure given in the Experiment 5

Layout generated layout for the MSJKFF

Similarly implement for the DFF and TFF

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 26 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 7

AIM Design Serial and paralle adder and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

Circuit Diagram

ProcedureSame as in experiment 5

S-EDIT FILE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 27 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Generated Layout for the above circuit

Note Similar procedure is followed for the construction of parallel AdderThe schematic of parallel adder is as given below

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 28 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 8AIM Design 41 Mux and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematicImplement using universal gatesProcedureFollow the steps as in experiment 5S-Edit

Generated layout for the above circuit

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 29 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 9AIM Design of Asynchronous Synchronous Up-Down counters with minimum number of gates and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

DESIGN OF SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER

TRUTH TABLEQ3 Q2 Q1 Q0 Q3

+ Q2+ Q1

+ Q0+

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 1 0 0 1 00 0 1 0 0 0 1 10 0 1 1 0 1 0 00 1 0 0 0 1 0 10 1 0 1 0 1 1 00 1 1 0 0 1 1 10 1 1 1 1 0 0 01 0 0 0 1 0 0 11 0 0 1 1 0 1 01 0 1 0 1 0 1 11 0 1 1 1 1 0 01 1 0 0 1 1 0 11 1 0 1 1 1 1 01 1 1 0 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

Now using the karnaugh map we find the simplified expressions for Q3+ Q2

+ Q1+ Q0

+

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 30 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

PROCEDURE

1) In the first step for building the circuit for a synchronous counter design a D-FF using NAND2 NAND3 gates as shown below using component instantiation (create the cell name and port name same as in the morbon20(in L-edit))

2) Update the symbol

3) Add the DFF cell(symbol) in the library Instantiate DFF to build the Asynchronous counter Same way build the circuit for Synchronous counter along with required gates as per the above design

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 31 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Asynchronous Counter

Synchronous Counter

4) Check the working of the both COUNTERs and verify the truth table as per the usual procedure of T-SPICE and W-EDIT

W-EDIT FILE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 32 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

5) Export the schematic and generate the layout by TPR

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 33 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 10

AIM Design SERIAL REGISTER capable of holding and shifting 4 bit words and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

Circuit

A Simple Shift Register Consisting of D-type Flip-flops

PROCEDURE

1) Use the same DFF used in counters

2) Circuit diagram

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 34 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

3) Export the schematic and generate the layout by TPR

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 35 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 12

AIM Design a barrel shifter using nMOSFETs and draw the schematic in schematic editor Verify the timing diagrams in schematic for shift right operation

TheoryA barrel shifter is a digital circuit that can shift a data word by a specified number of bits in one clock cycle It can be implemented as a sequence of multiplexers (mux) and in such an implementation the output of one mux is connected to the input of the next mux in a way that depends on the shift distance

For example take a 4-bit barrel shifter with inputs A B C and D The shifter can cycle the order of the bits ABCD as DABC CDAB or BCDA in this case no bits are lost That is it can shift all of the outputs up to three positions to the right (and thus make any cyclic combination of A B C and D) The barrel shifter has a variety of applications including being a vital component in microprocessors (alongside the ALU)

A common usage of a barrel shifter is in the hardware implementation of floating-point arithmetic For a floating-point add or subtract operation the significant of the two numbers must be aligned which requires shifting the smaller number to the right increasing its exponent until it matches the exponent of the larger number This is done by subtracting the exponents and using the barrel shifter to shift the smaller number to the right by the difference in one cycle If a simple shifter were used shifting by n bit positions would require n clock cycles

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 36 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 37 37 Mr Ravikant G B

  • The Digital Inverter or NOT gate
  • PROCEDURE
  • XOR Gate
  • The exclusive-OR (XOR) operator uses the symbol oplus and it performs the following logic operation
  • X oplus Y = X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y
  • The result is 1 only when either X is equal to 1 or Y is equal to 1 but not when both X and Y are equal to 1
  • XNOR Gate
  • The exclusive-NOR (XNOR) operator uses the symbol 1048703 and it performs the following logic operation
  • X 1048703Y = X Y + Xrsquo Yrsquo = (X oplus Y)rsquo
  • The result is 1 when either both X and Y are 0rsquos or when both are 1rsquos That is why this gate is often referred to as the Equivalence gate
  • The truth tables clearly show that the exclusive-NOR operation is the complement of the exclusive-OR
  • This can also be shown by algebraic manipulation as follows
  • (X oplus Y)rsquo = (X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y)rsquo
  • = (X Yrsquo)rsquo (Xrsquo Y)rsquo = (Xrsquo + Y) (X + Yrsquo)
  • = (XY + XrsquoYrsquo)
Page 13: vlsi manual

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

The result is 1 when either both X and Y are 0rsquos or when both are 1rsquos That is why this gate is often referred to as the Equivalence gate The truth tables clearly show that the exclusive-NOR operation is the complement of the exclusive-OR This can also be shown by algebraic manipulation as follows (X Y)rsquo = (X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y)rsquo oplus

= (X Yrsquo)rsquo (Xrsquo Y)rsquo = (Xrsquo + Y) (X + Yrsquo) = (XY + XrsquoYrsquo)

= X 10487031048703Y

The XOR gate can be constructed using MOSFETS as shown below

Schematic

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 13 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

T-Spice

Layout

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 14 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Spice Net list(Layout)

Waveforms

Perform the LVS for both schematic and layout

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 15 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Similarly perform an experiment for XNOR functionality as wellSchematic

Net List

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 16 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Layout

Simulations

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 17 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 4AIM Draw the circuits for AND gate and OR gate for specified length and width using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same draw the layout

a) For the above verify the timing diagrams in both schematic and layoutb) Plot voltage vs time and input voltage vs output voltagec) Perform the LVS to check circuit and layout equality

Procedure

And Gate1)Construct NAND gate and Inverter using the procedure mentioned before in s-edit using

MOSFETs2)Create a symbol for Nand and Inverter with the procedure below

Creating a Symbol 1)Construct a Nand Gate with MOSFETs as shown below2)Go to Cell in the tool bar and click on Update Symbol The symbol will be created Check for itrsquos

functionality in T-spice and save the s-edit project

3)Similarly construct the Inverter and update the symbol Check itrsquos functionality in T-spice and save the s-edit project

4)Open a new project to construct and gate Go to Add in the library Browser and add Nand and Inverter files which were constructed as shown below

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 18 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

5)Construct the And circuit with the symbols of Nand and inverter as shown below

6)Check the functionality in T-spice

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 19 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Waveforms in W-Edit

L-Edit

Note Add one inverter to the output of Nand gate Use poly contact while joining poly and metal

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 20 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

7)Similarly Construct Or gate using component instantiation in s-edit Verify itrsquos functionality using T-spiceBuild the layout by adding inverter to the output of the NOR gate

8)Perform the LVS for schematic and layout in both And gate as well as in Or gate to check the circuit equality in schematic and layout

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 21 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 5AIM Simplify the given expression and implement using the Universal (NAND) Logic Gates Use automatic place and Route for the layout

Ex 1) Y = ABrsquoCrsquo+ArsquoBrsquoCrsquo+ArsquoBCrsquo+ArsquoBrsquoC Simplify thisThis can be reduced to ArsquoBrsquo+BrsquoCrsquo+CrsquoArsquo

Procedure1 Construct the schematic for the above equation using only universal gates (Nand)2 Before implementing in schematic check the cell name and the port names of the logic

gates to be used in the circuit3 Steps for the (2)

a Open the L-Editor File-gtNew-gtbrowse for morbn20dtdb file(MyDocumentsmorbn20dmorbn20dtdb)

b Go to Cell-gtInstance-gtbrowse for morbn20d file (same path as above)Now go through the list of the library components Click the required cell and instantiate in the L-Editor From that instance note down the input and output port names And also note the cell name in the list

4 In schematic Editor ( this steps are only for the logic gates(ex Only for one nand gate)a File-gtNew Design-gtDesign Nameb Cell-gtNew Cell-gtcell name(same as the cell name in L-Editor library)c Draw the schematic and give the input and output names same as(3b)d Update the symbol Cell-gtUpdate symbole Go to properties window click on property icon(View-gtproperties)

and add the properties as shown in the below window

5 Implement the given expression in a New design instantiating the cell created in step (4) in S-Editor

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 22 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

6 Once the circuit is completed check for errors and simulation Export the design by using following stepsFiles-gtExport-gtExport TPR-gt Give the path (your design folder) to save the exported file in tpr format and click on Export

7 Go to L-Edit open New Design File-gtNew-gtbrowse for morbn20dtdb file(MyDocumentsmorbn20dmorbn20dtdb)

8 Click on Tools (from toolbar) -gt SPR -gt Place and Route9 A window will pop up Uncheck the last two options(Pad setup) Then click on Setup

from the same window Here browse for the technology file(morban20dext) and browse the path of the net list file ( tpr file path saved in step(6) ) Click on OK and then click on Run button

10 Layout will be generated automatically in the layout window for the designed circuit

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 23 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Example of the tpr file

C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_1 A A N_1C Nand3 A B C OutUNand3_1 N_6 N_5 N_4 OutC Nand2 A B OutUNand2_2 B B N_2C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_3 C C N_3C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_4 N_2 N_1 N_4C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_5 N_3 N_2 N_5C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_6 N_1 N_3 N_6

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 24 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 6AIM Draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor for

a) J K Flip flopb) J K Master Slave Flip flopc) D Flip flopd) T Flip flop

Verify the timing diagrams in schematic and generate the layout for the same using Place and route

Procedure

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 25 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Follow the same procedure given in the Experiment 5

Layout generated layout for the MSJKFF

Similarly implement for the DFF and TFF

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 26 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 7

AIM Design Serial and paralle adder and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

Circuit Diagram

ProcedureSame as in experiment 5

S-EDIT FILE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 27 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Generated Layout for the above circuit

Note Similar procedure is followed for the construction of parallel AdderThe schematic of parallel adder is as given below

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 28 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 8AIM Design 41 Mux and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematicImplement using universal gatesProcedureFollow the steps as in experiment 5S-Edit

Generated layout for the above circuit

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 29 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 9AIM Design of Asynchronous Synchronous Up-Down counters with minimum number of gates and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

DESIGN OF SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER

TRUTH TABLEQ3 Q2 Q1 Q0 Q3

+ Q2+ Q1

+ Q0+

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 1 0 0 1 00 0 1 0 0 0 1 10 0 1 1 0 1 0 00 1 0 0 0 1 0 10 1 0 1 0 1 1 00 1 1 0 0 1 1 10 1 1 1 1 0 0 01 0 0 0 1 0 0 11 0 0 1 1 0 1 01 0 1 0 1 0 1 11 0 1 1 1 1 0 01 1 0 0 1 1 0 11 1 0 1 1 1 1 01 1 1 0 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

Now using the karnaugh map we find the simplified expressions for Q3+ Q2

+ Q1+ Q0

+

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 30 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

PROCEDURE

1) In the first step for building the circuit for a synchronous counter design a D-FF using NAND2 NAND3 gates as shown below using component instantiation (create the cell name and port name same as in the morbon20(in L-edit))

2) Update the symbol

3) Add the DFF cell(symbol) in the library Instantiate DFF to build the Asynchronous counter Same way build the circuit for Synchronous counter along with required gates as per the above design

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 31 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Asynchronous Counter

Synchronous Counter

4) Check the working of the both COUNTERs and verify the truth table as per the usual procedure of T-SPICE and W-EDIT

W-EDIT FILE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 32 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

5) Export the schematic and generate the layout by TPR

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 33 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 10

AIM Design SERIAL REGISTER capable of holding and shifting 4 bit words and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

Circuit

A Simple Shift Register Consisting of D-type Flip-flops

PROCEDURE

1) Use the same DFF used in counters

2) Circuit diagram

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 34 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

3) Export the schematic and generate the layout by TPR

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 35 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 12

AIM Design a barrel shifter using nMOSFETs and draw the schematic in schematic editor Verify the timing diagrams in schematic for shift right operation

TheoryA barrel shifter is a digital circuit that can shift a data word by a specified number of bits in one clock cycle It can be implemented as a sequence of multiplexers (mux) and in such an implementation the output of one mux is connected to the input of the next mux in a way that depends on the shift distance

For example take a 4-bit barrel shifter with inputs A B C and D The shifter can cycle the order of the bits ABCD as DABC CDAB or BCDA in this case no bits are lost That is it can shift all of the outputs up to three positions to the right (and thus make any cyclic combination of A B C and D) The barrel shifter has a variety of applications including being a vital component in microprocessors (alongside the ALU)

A common usage of a barrel shifter is in the hardware implementation of floating-point arithmetic For a floating-point add or subtract operation the significant of the two numbers must be aligned which requires shifting the smaller number to the right increasing its exponent until it matches the exponent of the larger number This is done by subtracting the exponents and using the barrel shifter to shift the smaller number to the right by the difference in one cycle If a simple shifter were used shifting by n bit positions would require n clock cycles

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 36 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 37 37 Mr Ravikant G B

  • The Digital Inverter or NOT gate
  • PROCEDURE
  • XOR Gate
  • The exclusive-OR (XOR) operator uses the symbol oplus and it performs the following logic operation
  • X oplus Y = X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y
  • The result is 1 only when either X is equal to 1 or Y is equal to 1 but not when both X and Y are equal to 1
  • XNOR Gate
  • The exclusive-NOR (XNOR) operator uses the symbol 1048703 and it performs the following logic operation
  • X 1048703Y = X Y + Xrsquo Yrsquo = (X oplus Y)rsquo
  • The result is 1 when either both X and Y are 0rsquos or when both are 1rsquos That is why this gate is often referred to as the Equivalence gate
  • The truth tables clearly show that the exclusive-NOR operation is the complement of the exclusive-OR
  • This can also be shown by algebraic manipulation as follows
  • (X oplus Y)rsquo = (X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y)rsquo
  • = (X Yrsquo)rsquo (Xrsquo Y)rsquo = (Xrsquo + Y) (X + Yrsquo)
  • = (XY + XrsquoYrsquo)
Page 14: vlsi manual

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

T-Spice

Layout

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 14 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Spice Net list(Layout)

Waveforms

Perform the LVS for both schematic and layout

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 15 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Similarly perform an experiment for XNOR functionality as wellSchematic

Net List

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 16 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Layout

Simulations

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 17 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 4AIM Draw the circuits for AND gate and OR gate for specified length and width using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same draw the layout

a) For the above verify the timing diagrams in both schematic and layoutb) Plot voltage vs time and input voltage vs output voltagec) Perform the LVS to check circuit and layout equality

Procedure

And Gate1)Construct NAND gate and Inverter using the procedure mentioned before in s-edit using

MOSFETs2)Create a symbol for Nand and Inverter with the procedure below

Creating a Symbol 1)Construct a Nand Gate with MOSFETs as shown below2)Go to Cell in the tool bar and click on Update Symbol The symbol will be created Check for itrsquos

functionality in T-spice and save the s-edit project

3)Similarly construct the Inverter and update the symbol Check itrsquos functionality in T-spice and save the s-edit project

4)Open a new project to construct and gate Go to Add in the library Browser and add Nand and Inverter files which were constructed as shown below

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 18 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

5)Construct the And circuit with the symbols of Nand and inverter as shown below

6)Check the functionality in T-spice

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 19 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Waveforms in W-Edit

L-Edit

Note Add one inverter to the output of Nand gate Use poly contact while joining poly and metal

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 20 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

7)Similarly Construct Or gate using component instantiation in s-edit Verify itrsquos functionality using T-spiceBuild the layout by adding inverter to the output of the NOR gate

8)Perform the LVS for schematic and layout in both And gate as well as in Or gate to check the circuit equality in schematic and layout

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 21 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 5AIM Simplify the given expression and implement using the Universal (NAND) Logic Gates Use automatic place and Route for the layout

Ex 1) Y = ABrsquoCrsquo+ArsquoBrsquoCrsquo+ArsquoBCrsquo+ArsquoBrsquoC Simplify thisThis can be reduced to ArsquoBrsquo+BrsquoCrsquo+CrsquoArsquo

Procedure1 Construct the schematic for the above equation using only universal gates (Nand)2 Before implementing in schematic check the cell name and the port names of the logic

gates to be used in the circuit3 Steps for the (2)

a Open the L-Editor File-gtNew-gtbrowse for morbn20dtdb file(MyDocumentsmorbn20dmorbn20dtdb)

b Go to Cell-gtInstance-gtbrowse for morbn20d file (same path as above)Now go through the list of the library components Click the required cell and instantiate in the L-Editor From that instance note down the input and output port names And also note the cell name in the list

4 In schematic Editor ( this steps are only for the logic gates(ex Only for one nand gate)a File-gtNew Design-gtDesign Nameb Cell-gtNew Cell-gtcell name(same as the cell name in L-Editor library)c Draw the schematic and give the input and output names same as(3b)d Update the symbol Cell-gtUpdate symbole Go to properties window click on property icon(View-gtproperties)

and add the properties as shown in the below window

5 Implement the given expression in a New design instantiating the cell created in step (4) in S-Editor

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 22 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

6 Once the circuit is completed check for errors and simulation Export the design by using following stepsFiles-gtExport-gtExport TPR-gt Give the path (your design folder) to save the exported file in tpr format and click on Export

7 Go to L-Edit open New Design File-gtNew-gtbrowse for morbn20dtdb file(MyDocumentsmorbn20dmorbn20dtdb)

8 Click on Tools (from toolbar) -gt SPR -gt Place and Route9 A window will pop up Uncheck the last two options(Pad setup) Then click on Setup

from the same window Here browse for the technology file(morban20dext) and browse the path of the net list file ( tpr file path saved in step(6) ) Click on OK and then click on Run button

10 Layout will be generated automatically in the layout window for the designed circuit

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 23 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Example of the tpr file

C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_1 A A N_1C Nand3 A B C OutUNand3_1 N_6 N_5 N_4 OutC Nand2 A B OutUNand2_2 B B N_2C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_3 C C N_3C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_4 N_2 N_1 N_4C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_5 N_3 N_2 N_5C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_6 N_1 N_3 N_6

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 24 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 6AIM Draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor for

a) J K Flip flopb) J K Master Slave Flip flopc) D Flip flopd) T Flip flop

Verify the timing diagrams in schematic and generate the layout for the same using Place and route

Procedure

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 25 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Follow the same procedure given in the Experiment 5

Layout generated layout for the MSJKFF

Similarly implement for the DFF and TFF

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 26 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 7

AIM Design Serial and paralle adder and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

Circuit Diagram

ProcedureSame as in experiment 5

S-EDIT FILE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 27 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Generated Layout for the above circuit

Note Similar procedure is followed for the construction of parallel AdderThe schematic of parallel adder is as given below

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 28 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 8AIM Design 41 Mux and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematicImplement using universal gatesProcedureFollow the steps as in experiment 5S-Edit

Generated layout for the above circuit

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 29 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 9AIM Design of Asynchronous Synchronous Up-Down counters with minimum number of gates and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

DESIGN OF SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER

TRUTH TABLEQ3 Q2 Q1 Q0 Q3

+ Q2+ Q1

+ Q0+

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 1 0 0 1 00 0 1 0 0 0 1 10 0 1 1 0 1 0 00 1 0 0 0 1 0 10 1 0 1 0 1 1 00 1 1 0 0 1 1 10 1 1 1 1 0 0 01 0 0 0 1 0 0 11 0 0 1 1 0 1 01 0 1 0 1 0 1 11 0 1 1 1 1 0 01 1 0 0 1 1 0 11 1 0 1 1 1 1 01 1 1 0 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

Now using the karnaugh map we find the simplified expressions for Q3+ Q2

+ Q1+ Q0

+

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 30 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

PROCEDURE

1) In the first step for building the circuit for a synchronous counter design a D-FF using NAND2 NAND3 gates as shown below using component instantiation (create the cell name and port name same as in the morbon20(in L-edit))

2) Update the symbol

3) Add the DFF cell(symbol) in the library Instantiate DFF to build the Asynchronous counter Same way build the circuit for Synchronous counter along with required gates as per the above design

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 31 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Asynchronous Counter

Synchronous Counter

4) Check the working of the both COUNTERs and verify the truth table as per the usual procedure of T-SPICE and W-EDIT

W-EDIT FILE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 32 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

5) Export the schematic and generate the layout by TPR

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 33 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 10

AIM Design SERIAL REGISTER capable of holding and shifting 4 bit words and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

Circuit

A Simple Shift Register Consisting of D-type Flip-flops

PROCEDURE

1) Use the same DFF used in counters

2) Circuit diagram

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 34 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

3) Export the schematic and generate the layout by TPR

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 35 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 12

AIM Design a barrel shifter using nMOSFETs and draw the schematic in schematic editor Verify the timing diagrams in schematic for shift right operation

TheoryA barrel shifter is a digital circuit that can shift a data word by a specified number of bits in one clock cycle It can be implemented as a sequence of multiplexers (mux) and in such an implementation the output of one mux is connected to the input of the next mux in a way that depends on the shift distance

For example take a 4-bit barrel shifter with inputs A B C and D The shifter can cycle the order of the bits ABCD as DABC CDAB or BCDA in this case no bits are lost That is it can shift all of the outputs up to three positions to the right (and thus make any cyclic combination of A B C and D) The barrel shifter has a variety of applications including being a vital component in microprocessors (alongside the ALU)

A common usage of a barrel shifter is in the hardware implementation of floating-point arithmetic For a floating-point add or subtract operation the significant of the two numbers must be aligned which requires shifting the smaller number to the right increasing its exponent until it matches the exponent of the larger number This is done by subtracting the exponents and using the barrel shifter to shift the smaller number to the right by the difference in one cycle If a simple shifter were used shifting by n bit positions would require n clock cycles

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 36 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 37 37 Mr Ravikant G B

  • The Digital Inverter or NOT gate
  • PROCEDURE
  • XOR Gate
  • The exclusive-OR (XOR) operator uses the symbol oplus and it performs the following logic operation
  • X oplus Y = X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y
  • The result is 1 only when either X is equal to 1 or Y is equal to 1 but not when both X and Y are equal to 1
  • XNOR Gate
  • The exclusive-NOR (XNOR) operator uses the symbol 1048703 and it performs the following logic operation
  • X 1048703Y = X Y + Xrsquo Yrsquo = (X oplus Y)rsquo
  • The result is 1 when either both X and Y are 0rsquos or when both are 1rsquos That is why this gate is often referred to as the Equivalence gate
  • The truth tables clearly show that the exclusive-NOR operation is the complement of the exclusive-OR
  • This can also be shown by algebraic manipulation as follows
  • (X oplus Y)rsquo = (X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y)rsquo
  • = (X Yrsquo)rsquo (Xrsquo Y)rsquo = (Xrsquo + Y) (X + Yrsquo)
  • = (XY + XrsquoYrsquo)
Page 15: vlsi manual

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Spice Net list(Layout)

Waveforms

Perform the LVS for both schematic and layout

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 15 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Similarly perform an experiment for XNOR functionality as wellSchematic

Net List

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 16 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Layout

Simulations

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 17 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 4AIM Draw the circuits for AND gate and OR gate for specified length and width using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same draw the layout

a) For the above verify the timing diagrams in both schematic and layoutb) Plot voltage vs time and input voltage vs output voltagec) Perform the LVS to check circuit and layout equality

Procedure

And Gate1)Construct NAND gate and Inverter using the procedure mentioned before in s-edit using

MOSFETs2)Create a symbol for Nand and Inverter with the procedure below

Creating a Symbol 1)Construct a Nand Gate with MOSFETs as shown below2)Go to Cell in the tool bar and click on Update Symbol The symbol will be created Check for itrsquos

functionality in T-spice and save the s-edit project

3)Similarly construct the Inverter and update the symbol Check itrsquos functionality in T-spice and save the s-edit project

4)Open a new project to construct and gate Go to Add in the library Browser and add Nand and Inverter files which were constructed as shown below

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 18 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

5)Construct the And circuit with the symbols of Nand and inverter as shown below

6)Check the functionality in T-spice

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 19 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Waveforms in W-Edit

L-Edit

Note Add one inverter to the output of Nand gate Use poly contact while joining poly and metal

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 20 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

7)Similarly Construct Or gate using component instantiation in s-edit Verify itrsquos functionality using T-spiceBuild the layout by adding inverter to the output of the NOR gate

8)Perform the LVS for schematic and layout in both And gate as well as in Or gate to check the circuit equality in schematic and layout

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 21 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 5AIM Simplify the given expression and implement using the Universal (NAND) Logic Gates Use automatic place and Route for the layout

Ex 1) Y = ABrsquoCrsquo+ArsquoBrsquoCrsquo+ArsquoBCrsquo+ArsquoBrsquoC Simplify thisThis can be reduced to ArsquoBrsquo+BrsquoCrsquo+CrsquoArsquo

Procedure1 Construct the schematic for the above equation using only universal gates (Nand)2 Before implementing in schematic check the cell name and the port names of the logic

gates to be used in the circuit3 Steps for the (2)

a Open the L-Editor File-gtNew-gtbrowse for morbn20dtdb file(MyDocumentsmorbn20dmorbn20dtdb)

b Go to Cell-gtInstance-gtbrowse for morbn20d file (same path as above)Now go through the list of the library components Click the required cell and instantiate in the L-Editor From that instance note down the input and output port names And also note the cell name in the list

4 In schematic Editor ( this steps are only for the logic gates(ex Only for one nand gate)a File-gtNew Design-gtDesign Nameb Cell-gtNew Cell-gtcell name(same as the cell name in L-Editor library)c Draw the schematic and give the input and output names same as(3b)d Update the symbol Cell-gtUpdate symbole Go to properties window click on property icon(View-gtproperties)

and add the properties as shown in the below window

5 Implement the given expression in a New design instantiating the cell created in step (4) in S-Editor

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 22 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

6 Once the circuit is completed check for errors and simulation Export the design by using following stepsFiles-gtExport-gtExport TPR-gt Give the path (your design folder) to save the exported file in tpr format and click on Export

7 Go to L-Edit open New Design File-gtNew-gtbrowse for morbn20dtdb file(MyDocumentsmorbn20dmorbn20dtdb)

8 Click on Tools (from toolbar) -gt SPR -gt Place and Route9 A window will pop up Uncheck the last two options(Pad setup) Then click on Setup

from the same window Here browse for the technology file(morban20dext) and browse the path of the net list file ( tpr file path saved in step(6) ) Click on OK and then click on Run button

10 Layout will be generated automatically in the layout window for the designed circuit

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 23 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Example of the tpr file

C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_1 A A N_1C Nand3 A B C OutUNand3_1 N_6 N_5 N_4 OutC Nand2 A B OutUNand2_2 B B N_2C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_3 C C N_3C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_4 N_2 N_1 N_4C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_5 N_3 N_2 N_5C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_6 N_1 N_3 N_6

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 24 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 6AIM Draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor for

a) J K Flip flopb) J K Master Slave Flip flopc) D Flip flopd) T Flip flop

Verify the timing diagrams in schematic and generate the layout for the same using Place and route

Procedure

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 25 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Follow the same procedure given in the Experiment 5

Layout generated layout for the MSJKFF

Similarly implement for the DFF and TFF

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 26 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 7

AIM Design Serial and paralle adder and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

Circuit Diagram

ProcedureSame as in experiment 5

S-EDIT FILE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 27 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Generated Layout for the above circuit

Note Similar procedure is followed for the construction of parallel AdderThe schematic of parallel adder is as given below

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 28 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 8AIM Design 41 Mux and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematicImplement using universal gatesProcedureFollow the steps as in experiment 5S-Edit

Generated layout for the above circuit

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 29 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 9AIM Design of Asynchronous Synchronous Up-Down counters with minimum number of gates and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

DESIGN OF SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER

TRUTH TABLEQ3 Q2 Q1 Q0 Q3

+ Q2+ Q1

+ Q0+

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 1 0 0 1 00 0 1 0 0 0 1 10 0 1 1 0 1 0 00 1 0 0 0 1 0 10 1 0 1 0 1 1 00 1 1 0 0 1 1 10 1 1 1 1 0 0 01 0 0 0 1 0 0 11 0 0 1 1 0 1 01 0 1 0 1 0 1 11 0 1 1 1 1 0 01 1 0 0 1 1 0 11 1 0 1 1 1 1 01 1 1 0 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

Now using the karnaugh map we find the simplified expressions for Q3+ Q2

+ Q1+ Q0

+

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 30 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

PROCEDURE

1) In the first step for building the circuit for a synchronous counter design a D-FF using NAND2 NAND3 gates as shown below using component instantiation (create the cell name and port name same as in the morbon20(in L-edit))

2) Update the symbol

3) Add the DFF cell(symbol) in the library Instantiate DFF to build the Asynchronous counter Same way build the circuit for Synchronous counter along with required gates as per the above design

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 31 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Asynchronous Counter

Synchronous Counter

4) Check the working of the both COUNTERs and verify the truth table as per the usual procedure of T-SPICE and W-EDIT

W-EDIT FILE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 32 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

5) Export the schematic and generate the layout by TPR

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 33 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 10

AIM Design SERIAL REGISTER capable of holding and shifting 4 bit words and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

Circuit

A Simple Shift Register Consisting of D-type Flip-flops

PROCEDURE

1) Use the same DFF used in counters

2) Circuit diagram

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 34 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

3) Export the schematic and generate the layout by TPR

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 35 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 12

AIM Design a barrel shifter using nMOSFETs and draw the schematic in schematic editor Verify the timing diagrams in schematic for shift right operation

TheoryA barrel shifter is a digital circuit that can shift a data word by a specified number of bits in one clock cycle It can be implemented as a sequence of multiplexers (mux) and in such an implementation the output of one mux is connected to the input of the next mux in a way that depends on the shift distance

For example take a 4-bit barrel shifter with inputs A B C and D The shifter can cycle the order of the bits ABCD as DABC CDAB or BCDA in this case no bits are lost That is it can shift all of the outputs up to three positions to the right (and thus make any cyclic combination of A B C and D) The barrel shifter has a variety of applications including being a vital component in microprocessors (alongside the ALU)

A common usage of a barrel shifter is in the hardware implementation of floating-point arithmetic For a floating-point add or subtract operation the significant of the two numbers must be aligned which requires shifting the smaller number to the right increasing its exponent until it matches the exponent of the larger number This is done by subtracting the exponents and using the barrel shifter to shift the smaller number to the right by the difference in one cycle If a simple shifter were used shifting by n bit positions would require n clock cycles

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 36 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 37 37 Mr Ravikant G B

  • The Digital Inverter or NOT gate
  • PROCEDURE
  • XOR Gate
  • The exclusive-OR (XOR) operator uses the symbol oplus and it performs the following logic operation
  • X oplus Y = X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y
  • The result is 1 only when either X is equal to 1 or Y is equal to 1 but not when both X and Y are equal to 1
  • XNOR Gate
  • The exclusive-NOR (XNOR) operator uses the symbol 1048703 and it performs the following logic operation
  • X 1048703Y = X Y + Xrsquo Yrsquo = (X oplus Y)rsquo
  • The result is 1 when either both X and Y are 0rsquos or when both are 1rsquos That is why this gate is often referred to as the Equivalence gate
  • The truth tables clearly show that the exclusive-NOR operation is the complement of the exclusive-OR
  • This can also be shown by algebraic manipulation as follows
  • (X oplus Y)rsquo = (X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y)rsquo
  • = (X Yrsquo)rsquo (Xrsquo Y)rsquo = (Xrsquo + Y) (X + Yrsquo)
  • = (XY + XrsquoYrsquo)
Page 16: vlsi manual

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Similarly perform an experiment for XNOR functionality as wellSchematic

Net List

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 16 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Layout

Simulations

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 17 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 4AIM Draw the circuits for AND gate and OR gate for specified length and width using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same draw the layout

a) For the above verify the timing diagrams in both schematic and layoutb) Plot voltage vs time and input voltage vs output voltagec) Perform the LVS to check circuit and layout equality

Procedure

And Gate1)Construct NAND gate and Inverter using the procedure mentioned before in s-edit using

MOSFETs2)Create a symbol for Nand and Inverter with the procedure below

Creating a Symbol 1)Construct a Nand Gate with MOSFETs as shown below2)Go to Cell in the tool bar and click on Update Symbol The symbol will be created Check for itrsquos

functionality in T-spice and save the s-edit project

3)Similarly construct the Inverter and update the symbol Check itrsquos functionality in T-spice and save the s-edit project

4)Open a new project to construct and gate Go to Add in the library Browser and add Nand and Inverter files which were constructed as shown below

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 18 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

5)Construct the And circuit with the symbols of Nand and inverter as shown below

6)Check the functionality in T-spice

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 19 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Waveforms in W-Edit

L-Edit

Note Add one inverter to the output of Nand gate Use poly contact while joining poly and metal

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 20 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

7)Similarly Construct Or gate using component instantiation in s-edit Verify itrsquos functionality using T-spiceBuild the layout by adding inverter to the output of the NOR gate

8)Perform the LVS for schematic and layout in both And gate as well as in Or gate to check the circuit equality in schematic and layout

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 21 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 5AIM Simplify the given expression and implement using the Universal (NAND) Logic Gates Use automatic place and Route for the layout

Ex 1) Y = ABrsquoCrsquo+ArsquoBrsquoCrsquo+ArsquoBCrsquo+ArsquoBrsquoC Simplify thisThis can be reduced to ArsquoBrsquo+BrsquoCrsquo+CrsquoArsquo

Procedure1 Construct the schematic for the above equation using only universal gates (Nand)2 Before implementing in schematic check the cell name and the port names of the logic

gates to be used in the circuit3 Steps for the (2)

a Open the L-Editor File-gtNew-gtbrowse for morbn20dtdb file(MyDocumentsmorbn20dmorbn20dtdb)

b Go to Cell-gtInstance-gtbrowse for morbn20d file (same path as above)Now go through the list of the library components Click the required cell and instantiate in the L-Editor From that instance note down the input and output port names And also note the cell name in the list

4 In schematic Editor ( this steps are only for the logic gates(ex Only for one nand gate)a File-gtNew Design-gtDesign Nameb Cell-gtNew Cell-gtcell name(same as the cell name in L-Editor library)c Draw the schematic and give the input and output names same as(3b)d Update the symbol Cell-gtUpdate symbole Go to properties window click on property icon(View-gtproperties)

and add the properties as shown in the below window

5 Implement the given expression in a New design instantiating the cell created in step (4) in S-Editor

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 22 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

6 Once the circuit is completed check for errors and simulation Export the design by using following stepsFiles-gtExport-gtExport TPR-gt Give the path (your design folder) to save the exported file in tpr format and click on Export

7 Go to L-Edit open New Design File-gtNew-gtbrowse for morbn20dtdb file(MyDocumentsmorbn20dmorbn20dtdb)

8 Click on Tools (from toolbar) -gt SPR -gt Place and Route9 A window will pop up Uncheck the last two options(Pad setup) Then click on Setup

from the same window Here browse for the technology file(morban20dext) and browse the path of the net list file ( tpr file path saved in step(6) ) Click on OK and then click on Run button

10 Layout will be generated automatically in the layout window for the designed circuit

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 23 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Example of the tpr file

C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_1 A A N_1C Nand3 A B C OutUNand3_1 N_6 N_5 N_4 OutC Nand2 A B OutUNand2_2 B B N_2C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_3 C C N_3C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_4 N_2 N_1 N_4C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_5 N_3 N_2 N_5C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_6 N_1 N_3 N_6

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 24 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 6AIM Draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor for

a) J K Flip flopb) J K Master Slave Flip flopc) D Flip flopd) T Flip flop

Verify the timing diagrams in schematic and generate the layout for the same using Place and route

Procedure

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 25 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Follow the same procedure given in the Experiment 5

Layout generated layout for the MSJKFF

Similarly implement for the DFF and TFF

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 26 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 7

AIM Design Serial and paralle adder and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

Circuit Diagram

ProcedureSame as in experiment 5

S-EDIT FILE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 27 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Generated Layout for the above circuit

Note Similar procedure is followed for the construction of parallel AdderThe schematic of parallel adder is as given below

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 28 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 8AIM Design 41 Mux and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematicImplement using universal gatesProcedureFollow the steps as in experiment 5S-Edit

Generated layout for the above circuit

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 29 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 9AIM Design of Asynchronous Synchronous Up-Down counters with minimum number of gates and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

DESIGN OF SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER

TRUTH TABLEQ3 Q2 Q1 Q0 Q3

+ Q2+ Q1

+ Q0+

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 1 0 0 1 00 0 1 0 0 0 1 10 0 1 1 0 1 0 00 1 0 0 0 1 0 10 1 0 1 0 1 1 00 1 1 0 0 1 1 10 1 1 1 1 0 0 01 0 0 0 1 0 0 11 0 0 1 1 0 1 01 0 1 0 1 0 1 11 0 1 1 1 1 0 01 1 0 0 1 1 0 11 1 0 1 1 1 1 01 1 1 0 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

Now using the karnaugh map we find the simplified expressions for Q3+ Q2

+ Q1+ Q0

+

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 30 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

PROCEDURE

1) In the first step for building the circuit for a synchronous counter design a D-FF using NAND2 NAND3 gates as shown below using component instantiation (create the cell name and port name same as in the morbon20(in L-edit))

2) Update the symbol

3) Add the DFF cell(symbol) in the library Instantiate DFF to build the Asynchronous counter Same way build the circuit for Synchronous counter along with required gates as per the above design

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 31 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Asynchronous Counter

Synchronous Counter

4) Check the working of the both COUNTERs and verify the truth table as per the usual procedure of T-SPICE and W-EDIT

W-EDIT FILE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 32 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

5) Export the schematic and generate the layout by TPR

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 33 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 10

AIM Design SERIAL REGISTER capable of holding and shifting 4 bit words and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

Circuit

A Simple Shift Register Consisting of D-type Flip-flops

PROCEDURE

1) Use the same DFF used in counters

2) Circuit diagram

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 34 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

3) Export the schematic and generate the layout by TPR

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 35 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 12

AIM Design a barrel shifter using nMOSFETs and draw the schematic in schematic editor Verify the timing diagrams in schematic for shift right operation

TheoryA barrel shifter is a digital circuit that can shift a data word by a specified number of bits in one clock cycle It can be implemented as a sequence of multiplexers (mux) and in such an implementation the output of one mux is connected to the input of the next mux in a way that depends on the shift distance

For example take a 4-bit barrel shifter with inputs A B C and D The shifter can cycle the order of the bits ABCD as DABC CDAB or BCDA in this case no bits are lost That is it can shift all of the outputs up to three positions to the right (and thus make any cyclic combination of A B C and D) The barrel shifter has a variety of applications including being a vital component in microprocessors (alongside the ALU)

A common usage of a barrel shifter is in the hardware implementation of floating-point arithmetic For a floating-point add or subtract operation the significant of the two numbers must be aligned which requires shifting the smaller number to the right increasing its exponent until it matches the exponent of the larger number This is done by subtracting the exponents and using the barrel shifter to shift the smaller number to the right by the difference in one cycle If a simple shifter were used shifting by n bit positions would require n clock cycles

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 36 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 37 37 Mr Ravikant G B

  • The Digital Inverter or NOT gate
  • PROCEDURE
  • XOR Gate
  • The exclusive-OR (XOR) operator uses the symbol oplus and it performs the following logic operation
  • X oplus Y = X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y
  • The result is 1 only when either X is equal to 1 or Y is equal to 1 but not when both X and Y are equal to 1
  • XNOR Gate
  • The exclusive-NOR (XNOR) operator uses the symbol 1048703 and it performs the following logic operation
  • X 1048703Y = X Y + Xrsquo Yrsquo = (X oplus Y)rsquo
  • The result is 1 when either both X and Y are 0rsquos or when both are 1rsquos That is why this gate is often referred to as the Equivalence gate
  • The truth tables clearly show that the exclusive-NOR operation is the complement of the exclusive-OR
  • This can also be shown by algebraic manipulation as follows
  • (X oplus Y)rsquo = (X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y)rsquo
  • = (X Yrsquo)rsquo (Xrsquo Y)rsquo = (Xrsquo + Y) (X + Yrsquo)
  • = (XY + XrsquoYrsquo)
Page 17: vlsi manual

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Layout

Simulations

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 17 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 4AIM Draw the circuits for AND gate and OR gate for specified length and width using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same draw the layout

a) For the above verify the timing diagrams in both schematic and layoutb) Plot voltage vs time and input voltage vs output voltagec) Perform the LVS to check circuit and layout equality

Procedure

And Gate1)Construct NAND gate and Inverter using the procedure mentioned before in s-edit using

MOSFETs2)Create a symbol for Nand and Inverter with the procedure below

Creating a Symbol 1)Construct a Nand Gate with MOSFETs as shown below2)Go to Cell in the tool bar and click on Update Symbol The symbol will be created Check for itrsquos

functionality in T-spice and save the s-edit project

3)Similarly construct the Inverter and update the symbol Check itrsquos functionality in T-spice and save the s-edit project

4)Open a new project to construct and gate Go to Add in the library Browser and add Nand and Inverter files which were constructed as shown below

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 18 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

5)Construct the And circuit with the symbols of Nand and inverter as shown below

6)Check the functionality in T-spice

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 19 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Waveforms in W-Edit

L-Edit

Note Add one inverter to the output of Nand gate Use poly contact while joining poly and metal

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 20 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

7)Similarly Construct Or gate using component instantiation in s-edit Verify itrsquos functionality using T-spiceBuild the layout by adding inverter to the output of the NOR gate

8)Perform the LVS for schematic and layout in both And gate as well as in Or gate to check the circuit equality in schematic and layout

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 21 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 5AIM Simplify the given expression and implement using the Universal (NAND) Logic Gates Use automatic place and Route for the layout

Ex 1) Y = ABrsquoCrsquo+ArsquoBrsquoCrsquo+ArsquoBCrsquo+ArsquoBrsquoC Simplify thisThis can be reduced to ArsquoBrsquo+BrsquoCrsquo+CrsquoArsquo

Procedure1 Construct the schematic for the above equation using only universal gates (Nand)2 Before implementing in schematic check the cell name and the port names of the logic

gates to be used in the circuit3 Steps for the (2)

a Open the L-Editor File-gtNew-gtbrowse for morbn20dtdb file(MyDocumentsmorbn20dmorbn20dtdb)

b Go to Cell-gtInstance-gtbrowse for morbn20d file (same path as above)Now go through the list of the library components Click the required cell and instantiate in the L-Editor From that instance note down the input and output port names And also note the cell name in the list

4 In schematic Editor ( this steps are only for the logic gates(ex Only for one nand gate)a File-gtNew Design-gtDesign Nameb Cell-gtNew Cell-gtcell name(same as the cell name in L-Editor library)c Draw the schematic and give the input and output names same as(3b)d Update the symbol Cell-gtUpdate symbole Go to properties window click on property icon(View-gtproperties)

and add the properties as shown in the below window

5 Implement the given expression in a New design instantiating the cell created in step (4) in S-Editor

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 22 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

6 Once the circuit is completed check for errors and simulation Export the design by using following stepsFiles-gtExport-gtExport TPR-gt Give the path (your design folder) to save the exported file in tpr format and click on Export

7 Go to L-Edit open New Design File-gtNew-gtbrowse for morbn20dtdb file(MyDocumentsmorbn20dmorbn20dtdb)

8 Click on Tools (from toolbar) -gt SPR -gt Place and Route9 A window will pop up Uncheck the last two options(Pad setup) Then click on Setup

from the same window Here browse for the technology file(morban20dext) and browse the path of the net list file ( tpr file path saved in step(6) ) Click on OK and then click on Run button

10 Layout will be generated automatically in the layout window for the designed circuit

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 23 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Example of the tpr file

C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_1 A A N_1C Nand3 A B C OutUNand3_1 N_6 N_5 N_4 OutC Nand2 A B OutUNand2_2 B B N_2C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_3 C C N_3C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_4 N_2 N_1 N_4C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_5 N_3 N_2 N_5C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_6 N_1 N_3 N_6

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 24 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 6AIM Draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor for

a) J K Flip flopb) J K Master Slave Flip flopc) D Flip flopd) T Flip flop

Verify the timing diagrams in schematic and generate the layout for the same using Place and route

Procedure

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 25 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Follow the same procedure given in the Experiment 5

Layout generated layout for the MSJKFF

Similarly implement for the DFF and TFF

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 26 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 7

AIM Design Serial and paralle adder and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

Circuit Diagram

ProcedureSame as in experiment 5

S-EDIT FILE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 27 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Generated Layout for the above circuit

Note Similar procedure is followed for the construction of parallel AdderThe schematic of parallel adder is as given below

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 28 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 8AIM Design 41 Mux and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematicImplement using universal gatesProcedureFollow the steps as in experiment 5S-Edit

Generated layout for the above circuit

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 29 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 9AIM Design of Asynchronous Synchronous Up-Down counters with minimum number of gates and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

DESIGN OF SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER

TRUTH TABLEQ3 Q2 Q1 Q0 Q3

+ Q2+ Q1

+ Q0+

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 1 0 0 1 00 0 1 0 0 0 1 10 0 1 1 0 1 0 00 1 0 0 0 1 0 10 1 0 1 0 1 1 00 1 1 0 0 1 1 10 1 1 1 1 0 0 01 0 0 0 1 0 0 11 0 0 1 1 0 1 01 0 1 0 1 0 1 11 0 1 1 1 1 0 01 1 0 0 1 1 0 11 1 0 1 1 1 1 01 1 1 0 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

Now using the karnaugh map we find the simplified expressions for Q3+ Q2

+ Q1+ Q0

+

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 30 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

PROCEDURE

1) In the first step for building the circuit for a synchronous counter design a D-FF using NAND2 NAND3 gates as shown below using component instantiation (create the cell name and port name same as in the morbon20(in L-edit))

2) Update the symbol

3) Add the DFF cell(symbol) in the library Instantiate DFF to build the Asynchronous counter Same way build the circuit for Synchronous counter along with required gates as per the above design

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 31 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Asynchronous Counter

Synchronous Counter

4) Check the working of the both COUNTERs and verify the truth table as per the usual procedure of T-SPICE and W-EDIT

W-EDIT FILE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 32 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

5) Export the schematic and generate the layout by TPR

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 33 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 10

AIM Design SERIAL REGISTER capable of holding and shifting 4 bit words and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

Circuit

A Simple Shift Register Consisting of D-type Flip-flops

PROCEDURE

1) Use the same DFF used in counters

2) Circuit diagram

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 34 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

3) Export the schematic and generate the layout by TPR

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 35 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 12

AIM Design a barrel shifter using nMOSFETs and draw the schematic in schematic editor Verify the timing diagrams in schematic for shift right operation

TheoryA barrel shifter is a digital circuit that can shift a data word by a specified number of bits in one clock cycle It can be implemented as a sequence of multiplexers (mux) and in such an implementation the output of one mux is connected to the input of the next mux in a way that depends on the shift distance

For example take a 4-bit barrel shifter with inputs A B C and D The shifter can cycle the order of the bits ABCD as DABC CDAB or BCDA in this case no bits are lost That is it can shift all of the outputs up to three positions to the right (and thus make any cyclic combination of A B C and D) The barrel shifter has a variety of applications including being a vital component in microprocessors (alongside the ALU)

A common usage of a barrel shifter is in the hardware implementation of floating-point arithmetic For a floating-point add or subtract operation the significant of the two numbers must be aligned which requires shifting the smaller number to the right increasing its exponent until it matches the exponent of the larger number This is done by subtracting the exponents and using the barrel shifter to shift the smaller number to the right by the difference in one cycle If a simple shifter were used shifting by n bit positions would require n clock cycles

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 36 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 37 37 Mr Ravikant G B

  • The Digital Inverter or NOT gate
  • PROCEDURE
  • XOR Gate
  • The exclusive-OR (XOR) operator uses the symbol oplus and it performs the following logic operation
  • X oplus Y = X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y
  • The result is 1 only when either X is equal to 1 or Y is equal to 1 but not when both X and Y are equal to 1
  • XNOR Gate
  • The exclusive-NOR (XNOR) operator uses the symbol 1048703 and it performs the following logic operation
  • X 1048703Y = X Y + Xrsquo Yrsquo = (X oplus Y)rsquo
  • The result is 1 when either both X and Y are 0rsquos or when both are 1rsquos That is why this gate is often referred to as the Equivalence gate
  • The truth tables clearly show that the exclusive-NOR operation is the complement of the exclusive-OR
  • This can also be shown by algebraic manipulation as follows
  • (X oplus Y)rsquo = (X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y)rsquo
  • = (X Yrsquo)rsquo (Xrsquo Y)rsquo = (Xrsquo + Y) (X + Yrsquo)
  • = (XY + XrsquoYrsquo)
Page 18: vlsi manual

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 4AIM Draw the circuits for AND gate and OR gate for specified length and width using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same draw the layout

a) For the above verify the timing diagrams in both schematic and layoutb) Plot voltage vs time and input voltage vs output voltagec) Perform the LVS to check circuit and layout equality

Procedure

And Gate1)Construct NAND gate and Inverter using the procedure mentioned before in s-edit using

MOSFETs2)Create a symbol for Nand and Inverter with the procedure below

Creating a Symbol 1)Construct a Nand Gate with MOSFETs as shown below2)Go to Cell in the tool bar and click on Update Symbol The symbol will be created Check for itrsquos

functionality in T-spice and save the s-edit project

3)Similarly construct the Inverter and update the symbol Check itrsquos functionality in T-spice and save the s-edit project

4)Open a new project to construct and gate Go to Add in the library Browser and add Nand and Inverter files which were constructed as shown below

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 18 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

5)Construct the And circuit with the symbols of Nand and inverter as shown below

6)Check the functionality in T-spice

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 19 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Waveforms in W-Edit

L-Edit

Note Add one inverter to the output of Nand gate Use poly contact while joining poly and metal

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 20 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

7)Similarly Construct Or gate using component instantiation in s-edit Verify itrsquos functionality using T-spiceBuild the layout by adding inverter to the output of the NOR gate

8)Perform the LVS for schematic and layout in both And gate as well as in Or gate to check the circuit equality in schematic and layout

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 21 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 5AIM Simplify the given expression and implement using the Universal (NAND) Logic Gates Use automatic place and Route for the layout

Ex 1) Y = ABrsquoCrsquo+ArsquoBrsquoCrsquo+ArsquoBCrsquo+ArsquoBrsquoC Simplify thisThis can be reduced to ArsquoBrsquo+BrsquoCrsquo+CrsquoArsquo

Procedure1 Construct the schematic for the above equation using only universal gates (Nand)2 Before implementing in schematic check the cell name and the port names of the logic

gates to be used in the circuit3 Steps for the (2)

a Open the L-Editor File-gtNew-gtbrowse for morbn20dtdb file(MyDocumentsmorbn20dmorbn20dtdb)

b Go to Cell-gtInstance-gtbrowse for morbn20d file (same path as above)Now go through the list of the library components Click the required cell and instantiate in the L-Editor From that instance note down the input and output port names And also note the cell name in the list

4 In schematic Editor ( this steps are only for the logic gates(ex Only for one nand gate)a File-gtNew Design-gtDesign Nameb Cell-gtNew Cell-gtcell name(same as the cell name in L-Editor library)c Draw the schematic and give the input and output names same as(3b)d Update the symbol Cell-gtUpdate symbole Go to properties window click on property icon(View-gtproperties)

and add the properties as shown in the below window

5 Implement the given expression in a New design instantiating the cell created in step (4) in S-Editor

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 22 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

6 Once the circuit is completed check for errors and simulation Export the design by using following stepsFiles-gtExport-gtExport TPR-gt Give the path (your design folder) to save the exported file in tpr format and click on Export

7 Go to L-Edit open New Design File-gtNew-gtbrowse for morbn20dtdb file(MyDocumentsmorbn20dmorbn20dtdb)

8 Click on Tools (from toolbar) -gt SPR -gt Place and Route9 A window will pop up Uncheck the last two options(Pad setup) Then click on Setup

from the same window Here browse for the technology file(morban20dext) and browse the path of the net list file ( tpr file path saved in step(6) ) Click on OK and then click on Run button

10 Layout will be generated automatically in the layout window for the designed circuit

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 23 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Example of the tpr file

C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_1 A A N_1C Nand3 A B C OutUNand3_1 N_6 N_5 N_4 OutC Nand2 A B OutUNand2_2 B B N_2C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_3 C C N_3C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_4 N_2 N_1 N_4C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_5 N_3 N_2 N_5C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_6 N_1 N_3 N_6

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 24 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 6AIM Draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor for

a) J K Flip flopb) J K Master Slave Flip flopc) D Flip flopd) T Flip flop

Verify the timing diagrams in schematic and generate the layout for the same using Place and route

Procedure

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 25 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Follow the same procedure given in the Experiment 5

Layout generated layout for the MSJKFF

Similarly implement for the DFF and TFF

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 26 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 7

AIM Design Serial and paralle adder and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

Circuit Diagram

ProcedureSame as in experiment 5

S-EDIT FILE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 27 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Generated Layout for the above circuit

Note Similar procedure is followed for the construction of parallel AdderThe schematic of parallel adder is as given below

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 28 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 8AIM Design 41 Mux and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematicImplement using universal gatesProcedureFollow the steps as in experiment 5S-Edit

Generated layout for the above circuit

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 29 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 9AIM Design of Asynchronous Synchronous Up-Down counters with minimum number of gates and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

DESIGN OF SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER

TRUTH TABLEQ3 Q2 Q1 Q0 Q3

+ Q2+ Q1

+ Q0+

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 1 0 0 1 00 0 1 0 0 0 1 10 0 1 1 0 1 0 00 1 0 0 0 1 0 10 1 0 1 0 1 1 00 1 1 0 0 1 1 10 1 1 1 1 0 0 01 0 0 0 1 0 0 11 0 0 1 1 0 1 01 0 1 0 1 0 1 11 0 1 1 1 1 0 01 1 0 0 1 1 0 11 1 0 1 1 1 1 01 1 1 0 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

Now using the karnaugh map we find the simplified expressions for Q3+ Q2

+ Q1+ Q0

+

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 30 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

PROCEDURE

1) In the first step for building the circuit for a synchronous counter design a D-FF using NAND2 NAND3 gates as shown below using component instantiation (create the cell name and port name same as in the morbon20(in L-edit))

2) Update the symbol

3) Add the DFF cell(symbol) in the library Instantiate DFF to build the Asynchronous counter Same way build the circuit for Synchronous counter along with required gates as per the above design

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 31 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Asynchronous Counter

Synchronous Counter

4) Check the working of the both COUNTERs and verify the truth table as per the usual procedure of T-SPICE and W-EDIT

W-EDIT FILE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 32 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

5) Export the schematic and generate the layout by TPR

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 33 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 10

AIM Design SERIAL REGISTER capable of holding and shifting 4 bit words and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

Circuit

A Simple Shift Register Consisting of D-type Flip-flops

PROCEDURE

1) Use the same DFF used in counters

2) Circuit diagram

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 34 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

3) Export the schematic and generate the layout by TPR

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 35 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 12

AIM Design a barrel shifter using nMOSFETs and draw the schematic in schematic editor Verify the timing diagrams in schematic for shift right operation

TheoryA barrel shifter is a digital circuit that can shift a data word by a specified number of bits in one clock cycle It can be implemented as a sequence of multiplexers (mux) and in such an implementation the output of one mux is connected to the input of the next mux in a way that depends on the shift distance

For example take a 4-bit barrel shifter with inputs A B C and D The shifter can cycle the order of the bits ABCD as DABC CDAB or BCDA in this case no bits are lost That is it can shift all of the outputs up to three positions to the right (and thus make any cyclic combination of A B C and D) The barrel shifter has a variety of applications including being a vital component in microprocessors (alongside the ALU)

A common usage of a barrel shifter is in the hardware implementation of floating-point arithmetic For a floating-point add or subtract operation the significant of the two numbers must be aligned which requires shifting the smaller number to the right increasing its exponent until it matches the exponent of the larger number This is done by subtracting the exponents and using the barrel shifter to shift the smaller number to the right by the difference in one cycle If a simple shifter were used shifting by n bit positions would require n clock cycles

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 36 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 37 37 Mr Ravikant G B

  • The Digital Inverter or NOT gate
  • PROCEDURE
  • XOR Gate
  • The exclusive-OR (XOR) operator uses the symbol oplus and it performs the following logic operation
  • X oplus Y = X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y
  • The result is 1 only when either X is equal to 1 or Y is equal to 1 but not when both X and Y are equal to 1
  • XNOR Gate
  • The exclusive-NOR (XNOR) operator uses the symbol 1048703 and it performs the following logic operation
  • X 1048703Y = X Y + Xrsquo Yrsquo = (X oplus Y)rsquo
  • The result is 1 when either both X and Y are 0rsquos or when both are 1rsquos That is why this gate is often referred to as the Equivalence gate
  • The truth tables clearly show that the exclusive-NOR operation is the complement of the exclusive-OR
  • This can also be shown by algebraic manipulation as follows
  • (X oplus Y)rsquo = (X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y)rsquo
  • = (X Yrsquo)rsquo (Xrsquo Y)rsquo = (Xrsquo + Y) (X + Yrsquo)
  • = (XY + XrsquoYrsquo)
Page 19: vlsi manual

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

5)Construct the And circuit with the symbols of Nand and inverter as shown below

6)Check the functionality in T-spice

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 19 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Waveforms in W-Edit

L-Edit

Note Add one inverter to the output of Nand gate Use poly contact while joining poly and metal

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 20 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

7)Similarly Construct Or gate using component instantiation in s-edit Verify itrsquos functionality using T-spiceBuild the layout by adding inverter to the output of the NOR gate

8)Perform the LVS for schematic and layout in both And gate as well as in Or gate to check the circuit equality in schematic and layout

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 21 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 5AIM Simplify the given expression and implement using the Universal (NAND) Logic Gates Use automatic place and Route for the layout

Ex 1) Y = ABrsquoCrsquo+ArsquoBrsquoCrsquo+ArsquoBCrsquo+ArsquoBrsquoC Simplify thisThis can be reduced to ArsquoBrsquo+BrsquoCrsquo+CrsquoArsquo

Procedure1 Construct the schematic for the above equation using only universal gates (Nand)2 Before implementing in schematic check the cell name and the port names of the logic

gates to be used in the circuit3 Steps for the (2)

a Open the L-Editor File-gtNew-gtbrowse for morbn20dtdb file(MyDocumentsmorbn20dmorbn20dtdb)

b Go to Cell-gtInstance-gtbrowse for morbn20d file (same path as above)Now go through the list of the library components Click the required cell and instantiate in the L-Editor From that instance note down the input and output port names And also note the cell name in the list

4 In schematic Editor ( this steps are only for the logic gates(ex Only for one nand gate)a File-gtNew Design-gtDesign Nameb Cell-gtNew Cell-gtcell name(same as the cell name in L-Editor library)c Draw the schematic and give the input and output names same as(3b)d Update the symbol Cell-gtUpdate symbole Go to properties window click on property icon(View-gtproperties)

and add the properties as shown in the below window

5 Implement the given expression in a New design instantiating the cell created in step (4) in S-Editor

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 22 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

6 Once the circuit is completed check for errors and simulation Export the design by using following stepsFiles-gtExport-gtExport TPR-gt Give the path (your design folder) to save the exported file in tpr format and click on Export

7 Go to L-Edit open New Design File-gtNew-gtbrowse for morbn20dtdb file(MyDocumentsmorbn20dmorbn20dtdb)

8 Click on Tools (from toolbar) -gt SPR -gt Place and Route9 A window will pop up Uncheck the last two options(Pad setup) Then click on Setup

from the same window Here browse for the technology file(morban20dext) and browse the path of the net list file ( tpr file path saved in step(6) ) Click on OK and then click on Run button

10 Layout will be generated automatically in the layout window for the designed circuit

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 23 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Example of the tpr file

C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_1 A A N_1C Nand3 A B C OutUNand3_1 N_6 N_5 N_4 OutC Nand2 A B OutUNand2_2 B B N_2C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_3 C C N_3C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_4 N_2 N_1 N_4C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_5 N_3 N_2 N_5C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_6 N_1 N_3 N_6

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 24 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 6AIM Draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor for

a) J K Flip flopb) J K Master Slave Flip flopc) D Flip flopd) T Flip flop

Verify the timing diagrams in schematic and generate the layout for the same using Place and route

Procedure

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 25 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Follow the same procedure given in the Experiment 5

Layout generated layout for the MSJKFF

Similarly implement for the DFF and TFF

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 26 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 7

AIM Design Serial and paralle adder and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

Circuit Diagram

ProcedureSame as in experiment 5

S-EDIT FILE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 27 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Generated Layout for the above circuit

Note Similar procedure is followed for the construction of parallel AdderThe schematic of parallel adder is as given below

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 28 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 8AIM Design 41 Mux and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematicImplement using universal gatesProcedureFollow the steps as in experiment 5S-Edit

Generated layout for the above circuit

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 29 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 9AIM Design of Asynchronous Synchronous Up-Down counters with minimum number of gates and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

DESIGN OF SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER

TRUTH TABLEQ3 Q2 Q1 Q0 Q3

+ Q2+ Q1

+ Q0+

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 1 0 0 1 00 0 1 0 0 0 1 10 0 1 1 0 1 0 00 1 0 0 0 1 0 10 1 0 1 0 1 1 00 1 1 0 0 1 1 10 1 1 1 1 0 0 01 0 0 0 1 0 0 11 0 0 1 1 0 1 01 0 1 0 1 0 1 11 0 1 1 1 1 0 01 1 0 0 1 1 0 11 1 0 1 1 1 1 01 1 1 0 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

Now using the karnaugh map we find the simplified expressions for Q3+ Q2

+ Q1+ Q0

+

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 30 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

PROCEDURE

1) In the first step for building the circuit for a synchronous counter design a D-FF using NAND2 NAND3 gates as shown below using component instantiation (create the cell name and port name same as in the morbon20(in L-edit))

2) Update the symbol

3) Add the DFF cell(symbol) in the library Instantiate DFF to build the Asynchronous counter Same way build the circuit for Synchronous counter along with required gates as per the above design

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 31 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Asynchronous Counter

Synchronous Counter

4) Check the working of the both COUNTERs and verify the truth table as per the usual procedure of T-SPICE and W-EDIT

W-EDIT FILE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 32 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

5) Export the schematic and generate the layout by TPR

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 33 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 10

AIM Design SERIAL REGISTER capable of holding and shifting 4 bit words and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

Circuit

A Simple Shift Register Consisting of D-type Flip-flops

PROCEDURE

1) Use the same DFF used in counters

2) Circuit diagram

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 34 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

3) Export the schematic and generate the layout by TPR

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 35 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 12

AIM Design a barrel shifter using nMOSFETs and draw the schematic in schematic editor Verify the timing diagrams in schematic for shift right operation

TheoryA barrel shifter is a digital circuit that can shift a data word by a specified number of bits in one clock cycle It can be implemented as a sequence of multiplexers (mux) and in such an implementation the output of one mux is connected to the input of the next mux in a way that depends on the shift distance

For example take a 4-bit barrel shifter with inputs A B C and D The shifter can cycle the order of the bits ABCD as DABC CDAB or BCDA in this case no bits are lost That is it can shift all of the outputs up to three positions to the right (and thus make any cyclic combination of A B C and D) The barrel shifter has a variety of applications including being a vital component in microprocessors (alongside the ALU)

A common usage of a barrel shifter is in the hardware implementation of floating-point arithmetic For a floating-point add or subtract operation the significant of the two numbers must be aligned which requires shifting the smaller number to the right increasing its exponent until it matches the exponent of the larger number This is done by subtracting the exponents and using the barrel shifter to shift the smaller number to the right by the difference in one cycle If a simple shifter were used shifting by n bit positions would require n clock cycles

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 36 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 37 37 Mr Ravikant G B

  • The Digital Inverter or NOT gate
  • PROCEDURE
  • XOR Gate
  • The exclusive-OR (XOR) operator uses the symbol oplus and it performs the following logic operation
  • X oplus Y = X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y
  • The result is 1 only when either X is equal to 1 or Y is equal to 1 but not when both X and Y are equal to 1
  • XNOR Gate
  • The exclusive-NOR (XNOR) operator uses the symbol 1048703 and it performs the following logic operation
  • X 1048703Y = X Y + Xrsquo Yrsquo = (X oplus Y)rsquo
  • The result is 1 when either both X and Y are 0rsquos or when both are 1rsquos That is why this gate is often referred to as the Equivalence gate
  • The truth tables clearly show that the exclusive-NOR operation is the complement of the exclusive-OR
  • This can also be shown by algebraic manipulation as follows
  • (X oplus Y)rsquo = (X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y)rsquo
  • = (X Yrsquo)rsquo (Xrsquo Y)rsquo = (Xrsquo + Y) (X + Yrsquo)
  • = (XY + XrsquoYrsquo)
Page 20: vlsi manual

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Waveforms in W-Edit

L-Edit

Note Add one inverter to the output of Nand gate Use poly contact while joining poly and metal

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 20 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

7)Similarly Construct Or gate using component instantiation in s-edit Verify itrsquos functionality using T-spiceBuild the layout by adding inverter to the output of the NOR gate

8)Perform the LVS for schematic and layout in both And gate as well as in Or gate to check the circuit equality in schematic and layout

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 21 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 5AIM Simplify the given expression and implement using the Universal (NAND) Logic Gates Use automatic place and Route for the layout

Ex 1) Y = ABrsquoCrsquo+ArsquoBrsquoCrsquo+ArsquoBCrsquo+ArsquoBrsquoC Simplify thisThis can be reduced to ArsquoBrsquo+BrsquoCrsquo+CrsquoArsquo

Procedure1 Construct the schematic for the above equation using only universal gates (Nand)2 Before implementing in schematic check the cell name and the port names of the logic

gates to be used in the circuit3 Steps for the (2)

a Open the L-Editor File-gtNew-gtbrowse for morbn20dtdb file(MyDocumentsmorbn20dmorbn20dtdb)

b Go to Cell-gtInstance-gtbrowse for morbn20d file (same path as above)Now go through the list of the library components Click the required cell and instantiate in the L-Editor From that instance note down the input and output port names And also note the cell name in the list

4 In schematic Editor ( this steps are only for the logic gates(ex Only for one nand gate)a File-gtNew Design-gtDesign Nameb Cell-gtNew Cell-gtcell name(same as the cell name in L-Editor library)c Draw the schematic and give the input and output names same as(3b)d Update the symbol Cell-gtUpdate symbole Go to properties window click on property icon(View-gtproperties)

and add the properties as shown in the below window

5 Implement the given expression in a New design instantiating the cell created in step (4) in S-Editor

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 22 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

6 Once the circuit is completed check for errors and simulation Export the design by using following stepsFiles-gtExport-gtExport TPR-gt Give the path (your design folder) to save the exported file in tpr format and click on Export

7 Go to L-Edit open New Design File-gtNew-gtbrowse for morbn20dtdb file(MyDocumentsmorbn20dmorbn20dtdb)

8 Click on Tools (from toolbar) -gt SPR -gt Place and Route9 A window will pop up Uncheck the last two options(Pad setup) Then click on Setup

from the same window Here browse for the technology file(morban20dext) and browse the path of the net list file ( tpr file path saved in step(6) ) Click on OK and then click on Run button

10 Layout will be generated automatically in the layout window for the designed circuit

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 23 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Example of the tpr file

C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_1 A A N_1C Nand3 A B C OutUNand3_1 N_6 N_5 N_4 OutC Nand2 A B OutUNand2_2 B B N_2C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_3 C C N_3C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_4 N_2 N_1 N_4C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_5 N_3 N_2 N_5C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_6 N_1 N_3 N_6

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 24 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 6AIM Draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor for

a) J K Flip flopb) J K Master Slave Flip flopc) D Flip flopd) T Flip flop

Verify the timing diagrams in schematic and generate the layout for the same using Place and route

Procedure

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 25 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Follow the same procedure given in the Experiment 5

Layout generated layout for the MSJKFF

Similarly implement for the DFF and TFF

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 26 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 7

AIM Design Serial and paralle adder and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

Circuit Diagram

ProcedureSame as in experiment 5

S-EDIT FILE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 27 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Generated Layout for the above circuit

Note Similar procedure is followed for the construction of parallel AdderThe schematic of parallel adder is as given below

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 28 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 8AIM Design 41 Mux and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematicImplement using universal gatesProcedureFollow the steps as in experiment 5S-Edit

Generated layout for the above circuit

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 29 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 9AIM Design of Asynchronous Synchronous Up-Down counters with minimum number of gates and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

DESIGN OF SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER

TRUTH TABLEQ3 Q2 Q1 Q0 Q3

+ Q2+ Q1

+ Q0+

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 1 0 0 1 00 0 1 0 0 0 1 10 0 1 1 0 1 0 00 1 0 0 0 1 0 10 1 0 1 0 1 1 00 1 1 0 0 1 1 10 1 1 1 1 0 0 01 0 0 0 1 0 0 11 0 0 1 1 0 1 01 0 1 0 1 0 1 11 0 1 1 1 1 0 01 1 0 0 1 1 0 11 1 0 1 1 1 1 01 1 1 0 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

Now using the karnaugh map we find the simplified expressions for Q3+ Q2

+ Q1+ Q0

+

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 30 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

PROCEDURE

1) In the first step for building the circuit for a synchronous counter design a D-FF using NAND2 NAND3 gates as shown below using component instantiation (create the cell name and port name same as in the morbon20(in L-edit))

2) Update the symbol

3) Add the DFF cell(symbol) in the library Instantiate DFF to build the Asynchronous counter Same way build the circuit for Synchronous counter along with required gates as per the above design

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 31 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Asynchronous Counter

Synchronous Counter

4) Check the working of the both COUNTERs and verify the truth table as per the usual procedure of T-SPICE and W-EDIT

W-EDIT FILE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 32 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

5) Export the schematic and generate the layout by TPR

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 33 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 10

AIM Design SERIAL REGISTER capable of holding and shifting 4 bit words and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

Circuit

A Simple Shift Register Consisting of D-type Flip-flops

PROCEDURE

1) Use the same DFF used in counters

2) Circuit diagram

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 34 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

3) Export the schematic and generate the layout by TPR

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 35 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 12

AIM Design a barrel shifter using nMOSFETs and draw the schematic in schematic editor Verify the timing diagrams in schematic for shift right operation

TheoryA barrel shifter is a digital circuit that can shift a data word by a specified number of bits in one clock cycle It can be implemented as a sequence of multiplexers (mux) and in such an implementation the output of one mux is connected to the input of the next mux in a way that depends on the shift distance

For example take a 4-bit barrel shifter with inputs A B C and D The shifter can cycle the order of the bits ABCD as DABC CDAB or BCDA in this case no bits are lost That is it can shift all of the outputs up to three positions to the right (and thus make any cyclic combination of A B C and D) The barrel shifter has a variety of applications including being a vital component in microprocessors (alongside the ALU)

A common usage of a barrel shifter is in the hardware implementation of floating-point arithmetic For a floating-point add or subtract operation the significant of the two numbers must be aligned which requires shifting the smaller number to the right increasing its exponent until it matches the exponent of the larger number This is done by subtracting the exponents and using the barrel shifter to shift the smaller number to the right by the difference in one cycle If a simple shifter were used shifting by n bit positions would require n clock cycles

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 36 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 37 37 Mr Ravikant G B

  • The Digital Inverter or NOT gate
  • PROCEDURE
  • XOR Gate
  • The exclusive-OR (XOR) operator uses the symbol oplus and it performs the following logic operation
  • X oplus Y = X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y
  • The result is 1 only when either X is equal to 1 or Y is equal to 1 but not when both X and Y are equal to 1
  • XNOR Gate
  • The exclusive-NOR (XNOR) operator uses the symbol 1048703 and it performs the following logic operation
  • X 1048703Y = X Y + Xrsquo Yrsquo = (X oplus Y)rsquo
  • The result is 1 when either both X and Y are 0rsquos or when both are 1rsquos That is why this gate is often referred to as the Equivalence gate
  • The truth tables clearly show that the exclusive-NOR operation is the complement of the exclusive-OR
  • This can also be shown by algebraic manipulation as follows
  • (X oplus Y)rsquo = (X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y)rsquo
  • = (X Yrsquo)rsquo (Xrsquo Y)rsquo = (Xrsquo + Y) (X + Yrsquo)
  • = (XY + XrsquoYrsquo)
Page 21: vlsi manual

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

7)Similarly Construct Or gate using component instantiation in s-edit Verify itrsquos functionality using T-spiceBuild the layout by adding inverter to the output of the NOR gate

8)Perform the LVS for schematic and layout in both And gate as well as in Or gate to check the circuit equality in schematic and layout

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 21 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 5AIM Simplify the given expression and implement using the Universal (NAND) Logic Gates Use automatic place and Route for the layout

Ex 1) Y = ABrsquoCrsquo+ArsquoBrsquoCrsquo+ArsquoBCrsquo+ArsquoBrsquoC Simplify thisThis can be reduced to ArsquoBrsquo+BrsquoCrsquo+CrsquoArsquo

Procedure1 Construct the schematic for the above equation using only universal gates (Nand)2 Before implementing in schematic check the cell name and the port names of the logic

gates to be used in the circuit3 Steps for the (2)

a Open the L-Editor File-gtNew-gtbrowse for morbn20dtdb file(MyDocumentsmorbn20dmorbn20dtdb)

b Go to Cell-gtInstance-gtbrowse for morbn20d file (same path as above)Now go through the list of the library components Click the required cell and instantiate in the L-Editor From that instance note down the input and output port names And also note the cell name in the list

4 In schematic Editor ( this steps are only for the logic gates(ex Only for one nand gate)a File-gtNew Design-gtDesign Nameb Cell-gtNew Cell-gtcell name(same as the cell name in L-Editor library)c Draw the schematic and give the input and output names same as(3b)d Update the symbol Cell-gtUpdate symbole Go to properties window click on property icon(View-gtproperties)

and add the properties as shown in the below window

5 Implement the given expression in a New design instantiating the cell created in step (4) in S-Editor

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 22 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

6 Once the circuit is completed check for errors and simulation Export the design by using following stepsFiles-gtExport-gtExport TPR-gt Give the path (your design folder) to save the exported file in tpr format and click on Export

7 Go to L-Edit open New Design File-gtNew-gtbrowse for morbn20dtdb file(MyDocumentsmorbn20dmorbn20dtdb)

8 Click on Tools (from toolbar) -gt SPR -gt Place and Route9 A window will pop up Uncheck the last two options(Pad setup) Then click on Setup

from the same window Here browse for the technology file(morban20dext) and browse the path of the net list file ( tpr file path saved in step(6) ) Click on OK and then click on Run button

10 Layout will be generated automatically in the layout window for the designed circuit

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 23 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Example of the tpr file

C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_1 A A N_1C Nand3 A B C OutUNand3_1 N_6 N_5 N_4 OutC Nand2 A B OutUNand2_2 B B N_2C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_3 C C N_3C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_4 N_2 N_1 N_4C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_5 N_3 N_2 N_5C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_6 N_1 N_3 N_6

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 24 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 6AIM Draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor for

a) J K Flip flopb) J K Master Slave Flip flopc) D Flip flopd) T Flip flop

Verify the timing diagrams in schematic and generate the layout for the same using Place and route

Procedure

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 25 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Follow the same procedure given in the Experiment 5

Layout generated layout for the MSJKFF

Similarly implement for the DFF and TFF

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 26 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 7

AIM Design Serial and paralle adder and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

Circuit Diagram

ProcedureSame as in experiment 5

S-EDIT FILE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 27 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Generated Layout for the above circuit

Note Similar procedure is followed for the construction of parallel AdderThe schematic of parallel adder is as given below

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 28 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 8AIM Design 41 Mux and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematicImplement using universal gatesProcedureFollow the steps as in experiment 5S-Edit

Generated layout for the above circuit

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 29 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 9AIM Design of Asynchronous Synchronous Up-Down counters with minimum number of gates and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

DESIGN OF SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER

TRUTH TABLEQ3 Q2 Q1 Q0 Q3

+ Q2+ Q1

+ Q0+

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 1 0 0 1 00 0 1 0 0 0 1 10 0 1 1 0 1 0 00 1 0 0 0 1 0 10 1 0 1 0 1 1 00 1 1 0 0 1 1 10 1 1 1 1 0 0 01 0 0 0 1 0 0 11 0 0 1 1 0 1 01 0 1 0 1 0 1 11 0 1 1 1 1 0 01 1 0 0 1 1 0 11 1 0 1 1 1 1 01 1 1 0 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

Now using the karnaugh map we find the simplified expressions for Q3+ Q2

+ Q1+ Q0

+

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 30 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

PROCEDURE

1) In the first step for building the circuit for a synchronous counter design a D-FF using NAND2 NAND3 gates as shown below using component instantiation (create the cell name and port name same as in the morbon20(in L-edit))

2) Update the symbol

3) Add the DFF cell(symbol) in the library Instantiate DFF to build the Asynchronous counter Same way build the circuit for Synchronous counter along with required gates as per the above design

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 31 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Asynchronous Counter

Synchronous Counter

4) Check the working of the both COUNTERs and verify the truth table as per the usual procedure of T-SPICE and W-EDIT

W-EDIT FILE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 32 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

5) Export the schematic and generate the layout by TPR

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 33 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 10

AIM Design SERIAL REGISTER capable of holding and shifting 4 bit words and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

Circuit

A Simple Shift Register Consisting of D-type Flip-flops

PROCEDURE

1) Use the same DFF used in counters

2) Circuit diagram

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 34 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

3) Export the schematic and generate the layout by TPR

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 35 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 12

AIM Design a barrel shifter using nMOSFETs and draw the schematic in schematic editor Verify the timing diagrams in schematic for shift right operation

TheoryA barrel shifter is a digital circuit that can shift a data word by a specified number of bits in one clock cycle It can be implemented as a sequence of multiplexers (mux) and in such an implementation the output of one mux is connected to the input of the next mux in a way that depends on the shift distance

For example take a 4-bit barrel shifter with inputs A B C and D The shifter can cycle the order of the bits ABCD as DABC CDAB or BCDA in this case no bits are lost That is it can shift all of the outputs up to three positions to the right (and thus make any cyclic combination of A B C and D) The barrel shifter has a variety of applications including being a vital component in microprocessors (alongside the ALU)

A common usage of a barrel shifter is in the hardware implementation of floating-point arithmetic For a floating-point add or subtract operation the significant of the two numbers must be aligned which requires shifting the smaller number to the right increasing its exponent until it matches the exponent of the larger number This is done by subtracting the exponents and using the barrel shifter to shift the smaller number to the right by the difference in one cycle If a simple shifter were used shifting by n bit positions would require n clock cycles

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 36 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 37 37 Mr Ravikant G B

  • The Digital Inverter or NOT gate
  • PROCEDURE
  • XOR Gate
  • The exclusive-OR (XOR) operator uses the symbol oplus and it performs the following logic operation
  • X oplus Y = X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y
  • The result is 1 only when either X is equal to 1 or Y is equal to 1 but not when both X and Y are equal to 1
  • XNOR Gate
  • The exclusive-NOR (XNOR) operator uses the symbol 1048703 and it performs the following logic operation
  • X 1048703Y = X Y + Xrsquo Yrsquo = (X oplus Y)rsquo
  • The result is 1 when either both X and Y are 0rsquos or when both are 1rsquos That is why this gate is often referred to as the Equivalence gate
  • The truth tables clearly show that the exclusive-NOR operation is the complement of the exclusive-OR
  • This can also be shown by algebraic manipulation as follows
  • (X oplus Y)rsquo = (X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y)rsquo
  • = (X Yrsquo)rsquo (Xrsquo Y)rsquo = (Xrsquo + Y) (X + Yrsquo)
  • = (XY + XrsquoYrsquo)
Page 22: vlsi manual

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 5AIM Simplify the given expression and implement using the Universal (NAND) Logic Gates Use automatic place and Route for the layout

Ex 1) Y = ABrsquoCrsquo+ArsquoBrsquoCrsquo+ArsquoBCrsquo+ArsquoBrsquoC Simplify thisThis can be reduced to ArsquoBrsquo+BrsquoCrsquo+CrsquoArsquo

Procedure1 Construct the schematic for the above equation using only universal gates (Nand)2 Before implementing in schematic check the cell name and the port names of the logic

gates to be used in the circuit3 Steps for the (2)

a Open the L-Editor File-gtNew-gtbrowse for morbn20dtdb file(MyDocumentsmorbn20dmorbn20dtdb)

b Go to Cell-gtInstance-gtbrowse for morbn20d file (same path as above)Now go through the list of the library components Click the required cell and instantiate in the L-Editor From that instance note down the input and output port names And also note the cell name in the list

4 In schematic Editor ( this steps are only for the logic gates(ex Only for one nand gate)a File-gtNew Design-gtDesign Nameb Cell-gtNew Cell-gtcell name(same as the cell name in L-Editor library)c Draw the schematic and give the input and output names same as(3b)d Update the symbol Cell-gtUpdate symbole Go to properties window click on property icon(View-gtproperties)

and add the properties as shown in the below window

5 Implement the given expression in a New design instantiating the cell created in step (4) in S-Editor

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 22 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

6 Once the circuit is completed check for errors and simulation Export the design by using following stepsFiles-gtExport-gtExport TPR-gt Give the path (your design folder) to save the exported file in tpr format and click on Export

7 Go to L-Edit open New Design File-gtNew-gtbrowse for morbn20dtdb file(MyDocumentsmorbn20dmorbn20dtdb)

8 Click on Tools (from toolbar) -gt SPR -gt Place and Route9 A window will pop up Uncheck the last two options(Pad setup) Then click on Setup

from the same window Here browse for the technology file(morban20dext) and browse the path of the net list file ( tpr file path saved in step(6) ) Click on OK and then click on Run button

10 Layout will be generated automatically in the layout window for the designed circuit

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 23 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Example of the tpr file

C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_1 A A N_1C Nand3 A B C OutUNand3_1 N_6 N_5 N_4 OutC Nand2 A B OutUNand2_2 B B N_2C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_3 C C N_3C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_4 N_2 N_1 N_4C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_5 N_3 N_2 N_5C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_6 N_1 N_3 N_6

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 24 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 6AIM Draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor for

a) J K Flip flopb) J K Master Slave Flip flopc) D Flip flopd) T Flip flop

Verify the timing diagrams in schematic and generate the layout for the same using Place and route

Procedure

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 25 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Follow the same procedure given in the Experiment 5

Layout generated layout for the MSJKFF

Similarly implement for the DFF and TFF

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 26 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 7

AIM Design Serial and paralle adder and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

Circuit Diagram

ProcedureSame as in experiment 5

S-EDIT FILE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 27 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Generated Layout for the above circuit

Note Similar procedure is followed for the construction of parallel AdderThe schematic of parallel adder is as given below

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 28 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 8AIM Design 41 Mux and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematicImplement using universal gatesProcedureFollow the steps as in experiment 5S-Edit

Generated layout for the above circuit

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 29 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 9AIM Design of Asynchronous Synchronous Up-Down counters with minimum number of gates and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

DESIGN OF SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER

TRUTH TABLEQ3 Q2 Q1 Q0 Q3

+ Q2+ Q1

+ Q0+

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 1 0 0 1 00 0 1 0 0 0 1 10 0 1 1 0 1 0 00 1 0 0 0 1 0 10 1 0 1 0 1 1 00 1 1 0 0 1 1 10 1 1 1 1 0 0 01 0 0 0 1 0 0 11 0 0 1 1 0 1 01 0 1 0 1 0 1 11 0 1 1 1 1 0 01 1 0 0 1 1 0 11 1 0 1 1 1 1 01 1 1 0 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

Now using the karnaugh map we find the simplified expressions for Q3+ Q2

+ Q1+ Q0

+

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 30 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

PROCEDURE

1) In the first step for building the circuit for a synchronous counter design a D-FF using NAND2 NAND3 gates as shown below using component instantiation (create the cell name and port name same as in the morbon20(in L-edit))

2) Update the symbol

3) Add the DFF cell(symbol) in the library Instantiate DFF to build the Asynchronous counter Same way build the circuit for Synchronous counter along with required gates as per the above design

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 31 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Asynchronous Counter

Synchronous Counter

4) Check the working of the both COUNTERs and verify the truth table as per the usual procedure of T-SPICE and W-EDIT

W-EDIT FILE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 32 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

5) Export the schematic and generate the layout by TPR

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 33 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 10

AIM Design SERIAL REGISTER capable of holding and shifting 4 bit words and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

Circuit

A Simple Shift Register Consisting of D-type Flip-flops

PROCEDURE

1) Use the same DFF used in counters

2) Circuit diagram

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 34 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

3) Export the schematic and generate the layout by TPR

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 35 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 12

AIM Design a barrel shifter using nMOSFETs and draw the schematic in schematic editor Verify the timing diagrams in schematic for shift right operation

TheoryA barrel shifter is a digital circuit that can shift a data word by a specified number of bits in one clock cycle It can be implemented as a sequence of multiplexers (mux) and in such an implementation the output of one mux is connected to the input of the next mux in a way that depends on the shift distance

For example take a 4-bit barrel shifter with inputs A B C and D The shifter can cycle the order of the bits ABCD as DABC CDAB or BCDA in this case no bits are lost That is it can shift all of the outputs up to three positions to the right (and thus make any cyclic combination of A B C and D) The barrel shifter has a variety of applications including being a vital component in microprocessors (alongside the ALU)

A common usage of a barrel shifter is in the hardware implementation of floating-point arithmetic For a floating-point add or subtract operation the significant of the two numbers must be aligned which requires shifting the smaller number to the right increasing its exponent until it matches the exponent of the larger number This is done by subtracting the exponents and using the barrel shifter to shift the smaller number to the right by the difference in one cycle If a simple shifter were used shifting by n bit positions would require n clock cycles

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 36 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 37 37 Mr Ravikant G B

  • The Digital Inverter or NOT gate
  • PROCEDURE
  • XOR Gate
  • The exclusive-OR (XOR) operator uses the symbol oplus and it performs the following logic operation
  • X oplus Y = X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y
  • The result is 1 only when either X is equal to 1 or Y is equal to 1 but not when both X and Y are equal to 1
  • XNOR Gate
  • The exclusive-NOR (XNOR) operator uses the symbol 1048703 and it performs the following logic operation
  • X 1048703Y = X Y + Xrsquo Yrsquo = (X oplus Y)rsquo
  • The result is 1 when either both X and Y are 0rsquos or when both are 1rsquos That is why this gate is often referred to as the Equivalence gate
  • The truth tables clearly show that the exclusive-NOR operation is the complement of the exclusive-OR
  • This can also be shown by algebraic manipulation as follows
  • (X oplus Y)rsquo = (X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y)rsquo
  • = (X Yrsquo)rsquo (Xrsquo Y)rsquo = (Xrsquo + Y) (X + Yrsquo)
  • = (XY + XrsquoYrsquo)
Page 23: vlsi manual

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

6 Once the circuit is completed check for errors and simulation Export the design by using following stepsFiles-gtExport-gtExport TPR-gt Give the path (your design folder) to save the exported file in tpr format and click on Export

7 Go to L-Edit open New Design File-gtNew-gtbrowse for morbn20dtdb file(MyDocumentsmorbn20dmorbn20dtdb)

8 Click on Tools (from toolbar) -gt SPR -gt Place and Route9 A window will pop up Uncheck the last two options(Pad setup) Then click on Setup

from the same window Here browse for the technology file(morban20dext) and browse the path of the net list file ( tpr file path saved in step(6) ) Click on OK and then click on Run button

10 Layout will be generated automatically in the layout window for the designed circuit

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 23 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Example of the tpr file

C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_1 A A N_1C Nand3 A B C OutUNand3_1 N_6 N_5 N_4 OutC Nand2 A B OutUNand2_2 B B N_2C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_3 C C N_3C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_4 N_2 N_1 N_4C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_5 N_3 N_2 N_5C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_6 N_1 N_3 N_6

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 24 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 6AIM Draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor for

a) J K Flip flopb) J K Master Slave Flip flopc) D Flip flopd) T Flip flop

Verify the timing diagrams in schematic and generate the layout for the same using Place and route

Procedure

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 25 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Follow the same procedure given in the Experiment 5

Layout generated layout for the MSJKFF

Similarly implement for the DFF and TFF

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 26 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 7

AIM Design Serial and paralle adder and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

Circuit Diagram

ProcedureSame as in experiment 5

S-EDIT FILE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 27 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Generated Layout for the above circuit

Note Similar procedure is followed for the construction of parallel AdderThe schematic of parallel adder is as given below

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 28 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 8AIM Design 41 Mux and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematicImplement using universal gatesProcedureFollow the steps as in experiment 5S-Edit

Generated layout for the above circuit

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 29 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 9AIM Design of Asynchronous Synchronous Up-Down counters with minimum number of gates and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

DESIGN OF SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER

TRUTH TABLEQ3 Q2 Q1 Q0 Q3

+ Q2+ Q1

+ Q0+

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 1 0 0 1 00 0 1 0 0 0 1 10 0 1 1 0 1 0 00 1 0 0 0 1 0 10 1 0 1 0 1 1 00 1 1 0 0 1 1 10 1 1 1 1 0 0 01 0 0 0 1 0 0 11 0 0 1 1 0 1 01 0 1 0 1 0 1 11 0 1 1 1 1 0 01 1 0 0 1 1 0 11 1 0 1 1 1 1 01 1 1 0 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

Now using the karnaugh map we find the simplified expressions for Q3+ Q2

+ Q1+ Q0

+

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 30 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

PROCEDURE

1) In the first step for building the circuit for a synchronous counter design a D-FF using NAND2 NAND3 gates as shown below using component instantiation (create the cell name and port name same as in the morbon20(in L-edit))

2) Update the symbol

3) Add the DFF cell(symbol) in the library Instantiate DFF to build the Asynchronous counter Same way build the circuit for Synchronous counter along with required gates as per the above design

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 31 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Asynchronous Counter

Synchronous Counter

4) Check the working of the both COUNTERs and verify the truth table as per the usual procedure of T-SPICE and W-EDIT

W-EDIT FILE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 32 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

5) Export the schematic and generate the layout by TPR

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 33 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 10

AIM Design SERIAL REGISTER capable of holding and shifting 4 bit words and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

Circuit

A Simple Shift Register Consisting of D-type Flip-flops

PROCEDURE

1) Use the same DFF used in counters

2) Circuit diagram

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 34 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

3) Export the schematic and generate the layout by TPR

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 35 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 12

AIM Design a barrel shifter using nMOSFETs and draw the schematic in schematic editor Verify the timing diagrams in schematic for shift right operation

TheoryA barrel shifter is a digital circuit that can shift a data word by a specified number of bits in one clock cycle It can be implemented as a sequence of multiplexers (mux) and in such an implementation the output of one mux is connected to the input of the next mux in a way that depends on the shift distance

For example take a 4-bit barrel shifter with inputs A B C and D The shifter can cycle the order of the bits ABCD as DABC CDAB or BCDA in this case no bits are lost That is it can shift all of the outputs up to three positions to the right (and thus make any cyclic combination of A B C and D) The barrel shifter has a variety of applications including being a vital component in microprocessors (alongside the ALU)

A common usage of a barrel shifter is in the hardware implementation of floating-point arithmetic For a floating-point add or subtract operation the significant of the two numbers must be aligned which requires shifting the smaller number to the right increasing its exponent until it matches the exponent of the larger number This is done by subtracting the exponents and using the barrel shifter to shift the smaller number to the right by the difference in one cycle If a simple shifter were used shifting by n bit positions would require n clock cycles

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 36 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 37 37 Mr Ravikant G B

  • The Digital Inverter or NOT gate
  • PROCEDURE
  • XOR Gate
  • The exclusive-OR (XOR) operator uses the symbol oplus and it performs the following logic operation
  • X oplus Y = X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y
  • The result is 1 only when either X is equal to 1 or Y is equal to 1 but not when both X and Y are equal to 1
  • XNOR Gate
  • The exclusive-NOR (XNOR) operator uses the symbol 1048703 and it performs the following logic operation
  • X 1048703Y = X Y + Xrsquo Yrsquo = (X oplus Y)rsquo
  • The result is 1 when either both X and Y are 0rsquos or when both are 1rsquos That is why this gate is often referred to as the Equivalence gate
  • The truth tables clearly show that the exclusive-NOR operation is the complement of the exclusive-OR
  • This can also be shown by algebraic manipulation as follows
  • (X oplus Y)rsquo = (X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y)rsquo
  • = (X Yrsquo)rsquo (Xrsquo Y)rsquo = (Xrsquo + Y) (X + Yrsquo)
  • = (XY + XrsquoYrsquo)
Page 24: vlsi manual

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Example of the tpr file

C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_1 A A N_1C Nand3 A B C OutUNand3_1 N_6 N_5 N_4 OutC Nand2 A B OutUNand2_2 B B N_2C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_3 C C N_3C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_4 N_2 N_1 N_4C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_5 N_3 N_2 N_5C Nand2 A B OutUNand2_6 N_1 N_3 N_6

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 24 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 6AIM Draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor for

a) J K Flip flopb) J K Master Slave Flip flopc) D Flip flopd) T Flip flop

Verify the timing diagrams in schematic and generate the layout for the same using Place and route

Procedure

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 25 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Follow the same procedure given in the Experiment 5

Layout generated layout for the MSJKFF

Similarly implement for the DFF and TFF

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 26 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 7

AIM Design Serial and paralle adder and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

Circuit Diagram

ProcedureSame as in experiment 5

S-EDIT FILE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 27 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Generated Layout for the above circuit

Note Similar procedure is followed for the construction of parallel AdderThe schematic of parallel adder is as given below

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 28 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 8AIM Design 41 Mux and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematicImplement using universal gatesProcedureFollow the steps as in experiment 5S-Edit

Generated layout for the above circuit

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 29 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 9AIM Design of Asynchronous Synchronous Up-Down counters with minimum number of gates and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

DESIGN OF SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER

TRUTH TABLEQ3 Q2 Q1 Q0 Q3

+ Q2+ Q1

+ Q0+

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 1 0 0 1 00 0 1 0 0 0 1 10 0 1 1 0 1 0 00 1 0 0 0 1 0 10 1 0 1 0 1 1 00 1 1 0 0 1 1 10 1 1 1 1 0 0 01 0 0 0 1 0 0 11 0 0 1 1 0 1 01 0 1 0 1 0 1 11 0 1 1 1 1 0 01 1 0 0 1 1 0 11 1 0 1 1 1 1 01 1 1 0 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

Now using the karnaugh map we find the simplified expressions for Q3+ Q2

+ Q1+ Q0

+

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 30 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

PROCEDURE

1) In the first step for building the circuit for a synchronous counter design a D-FF using NAND2 NAND3 gates as shown below using component instantiation (create the cell name and port name same as in the morbon20(in L-edit))

2) Update the symbol

3) Add the DFF cell(symbol) in the library Instantiate DFF to build the Asynchronous counter Same way build the circuit for Synchronous counter along with required gates as per the above design

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 31 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Asynchronous Counter

Synchronous Counter

4) Check the working of the both COUNTERs and verify the truth table as per the usual procedure of T-SPICE and W-EDIT

W-EDIT FILE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 32 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

5) Export the schematic and generate the layout by TPR

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 33 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 10

AIM Design SERIAL REGISTER capable of holding and shifting 4 bit words and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

Circuit

A Simple Shift Register Consisting of D-type Flip-flops

PROCEDURE

1) Use the same DFF used in counters

2) Circuit diagram

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 34 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

3) Export the schematic and generate the layout by TPR

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 35 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 12

AIM Design a barrel shifter using nMOSFETs and draw the schematic in schematic editor Verify the timing diagrams in schematic for shift right operation

TheoryA barrel shifter is a digital circuit that can shift a data word by a specified number of bits in one clock cycle It can be implemented as a sequence of multiplexers (mux) and in such an implementation the output of one mux is connected to the input of the next mux in a way that depends on the shift distance

For example take a 4-bit barrel shifter with inputs A B C and D The shifter can cycle the order of the bits ABCD as DABC CDAB or BCDA in this case no bits are lost That is it can shift all of the outputs up to three positions to the right (and thus make any cyclic combination of A B C and D) The barrel shifter has a variety of applications including being a vital component in microprocessors (alongside the ALU)

A common usage of a barrel shifter is in the hardware implementation of floating-point arithmetic For a floating-point add or subtract operation the significant of the two numbers must be aligned which requires shifting the smaller number to the right increasing its exponent until it matches the exponent of the larger number This is done by subtracting the exponents and using the barrel shifter to shift the smaller number to the right by the difference in one cycle If a simple shifter were used shifting by n bit positions would require n clock cycles

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 36 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 37 37 Mr Ravikant G B

  • The Digital Inverter or NOT gate
  • PROCEDURE
  • XOR Gate
  • The exclusive-OR (XOR) operator uses the symbol oplus and it performs the following logic operation
  • X oplus Y = X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y
  • The result is 1 only when either X is equal to 1 or Y is equal to 1 but not when both X and Y are equal to 1
  • XNOR Gate
  • The exclusive-NOR (XNOR) operator uses the symbol 1048703 and it performs the following logic operation
  • X 1048703Y = X Y + Xrsquo Yrsquo = (X oplus Y)rsquo
  • The result is 1 when either both X and Y are 0rsquos or when both are 1rsquos That is why this gate is often referred to as the Equivalence gate
  • The truth tables clearly show that the exclusive-NOR operation is the complement of the exclusive-OR
  • This can also be shown by algebraic manipulation as follows
  • (X oplus Y)rsquo = (X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y)rsquo
  • = (X Yrsquo)rsquo (Xrsquo Y)rsquo = (Xrsquo + Y) (X + Yrsquo)
  • = (XY + XrsquoYrsquo)
Page 25: vlsi manual

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 6AIM Draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor for

a) J K Flip flopb) J K Master Slave Flip flopc) D Flip flopd) T Flip flop

Verify the timing diagrams in schematic and generate the layout for the same using Place and route

Procedure

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 25 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Follow the same procedure given in the Experiment 5

Layout generated layout for the MSJKFF

Similarly implement for the DFF and TFF

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 26 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 7

AIM Design Serial and paralle adder and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

Circuit Diagram

ProcedureSame as in experiment 5

S-EDIT FILE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 27 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Generated Layout for the above circuit

Note Similar procedure is followed for the construction of parallel AdderThe schematic of parallel adder is as given below

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 28 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 8AIM Design 41 Mux and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematicImplement using universal gatesProcedureFollow the steps as in experiment 5S-Edit

Generated layout for the above circuit

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 29 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 9AIM Design of Asynchronous Synchronous Up-Down counters with minimum number of gates and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

DESIGN OF SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER

TRUTH TABLEQ3 Q2 Q1 Q0 Q3

+ Q2+ Q1

+ Q0+

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 1 0 0 1 00 0 1 0 0 0 1 10 0 1 1 0 1 0 00 1 0 0 0 1 0 10 1 0 1 0 1 1 00 1 1 0 0 1 1 10 1 1 1 1 0 0 01 0 0 0 1 0 0 11 0 0 1 1 0 1 01 0 1 0 1 0 1 11 0 1 1 1 1 0 01 1 0 0 1 1 0 11 1 0 1 1 1 1 01 1 1 0 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

Now using the karnaugh map we find the simplified expressions for Q3+ Q2

+ Q1+ Q0

+

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 30 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

PROCEDURE

1) In the first step for building the circuit for a synchronous counter design a D-FF using NAND2 NAND3 gates as shown below using component instantiation (create the cell name and port name same as in the morbon20(in L-edit))

2) Update the symbol

3) Add the DFF cell(symbol) in the library Instantiate DFF to build the Asynchronous counter Same way build the circuit for Synchronous counter along with required gates as per the above design

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 31 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Asynchronous Counter

Synchronous Counter

4) Check the working of the both COUNTERs and verify the truth table as per the usual procedure of T-SPICE and W-EDIT

W-EDIT FILE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 32 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

5) Export the schematic and generate the layout by TPR

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 33 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 10

AIM Design SERIAL REGISTER capable of holding and shifting 4 bit words and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

Circuit

A Simple Shift Register Consisting of D-type Flip-flops

PROCEDURE

1) Use the same DFF used in counters

2) Circuit diagram

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 34 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

3) Export the schematic and generate the layout by TPR

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 35 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 12

AIM Design a barrel shifter using nMOSFETs and draw the schematic in schematic editor Verify the timing diagrams in schematic for shift right operation

TheoryA barrel shifter is a digital circuit that can shift a data word by a specified number of bits in one clock cycle It can be implemented as a sequence of multiplexers (mux) and in such an implementation the output of one mux is connected to the input of the next mux in a way that depends on the shift distance

For example take a 4-bit barrel shifter with inputs A B C and D The shifter can cycle the order of the bits ABCD as DABC CDAB or BCDA in this case no bits are lost That is it can shift all of the outputs up to three positions to the right (and thus make any cyclic combination of A B C and D) The barrel shifter has a variety of applications including being a vital component in microprocessors (alongside the ALU)

A common usage of a barrel shifter is in the hardware implementation of floating-point arithmetic For a floating-point add or subtract operation the significant of the two numbers must be aligned which requires shifting the smaller number to the right increasing its exponent until it matches the exponent of the larger number This is done by subtracting the exponents and using the barrel shifter to shift the smaller number to the right by the difference in one cycle If a simple shifter were used shifting by n bit positions would require n clock cycles

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 36 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 37 37 Mr Ravikant G B

  • The Digital Inverter or NOT gate
  • PROCEDURE
  • XOR Gate
  • The exclusive-OR (XOR) operator uses the symbol oplus and it performs the following logic operation
  • X oplus Y = X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y
  • The result is 1 only when either X is equal to 1 or Y is equal to 1 but not when both X and Y are equal to 1
  • XNOR Gate
  • The exclusive-NOR (XNOR) operator uses the symbol 1048703 and it performs the following logic operation
  • X 1048703Y = X Y + Xrsquo Yrsquo = (X oplus Y)rsquo
  • The result is 1 when either both X and Y are 0rsquos or when both are 1rsquos That is why this gate is often referred to as the Equivalence gate
  • The truth tables clearly show that the exclusive-NOR operation is the complement of the exclusive-OR
  • This can also be shown by algebraic manipulation as follows
  • (X oplus Y)rsquo = (X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y)rsquo
  • = (X Yrsquo)rsquo (Xrsquo Y)rsquo = (Xrsquo + Y) (X + Yrsquo)
  • = (XY + XrsquoYrsquo)
Page 26: vlsi manual

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Follow the same procedure given in the Experiment 5

Layout generated layout for the MSJKFF

Similarly implement for the DFF and TFF

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 26 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 7

AIM Design Serial and paralle adder and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

Circuit Diagram

ProcedureSame as in experiment 5

S-EDIT FILE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 27 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Generated Layout for the above circuit

Note Similar procedure is followed for the construction of parallel AdderThe schematic of parallel adder is as given below

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 28 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 8AIM Design 41 Mux and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematicImplement using universal gatesProcedureFollow the steps as in experiment 5S-Edit

Generated layout for the above circuit

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 29 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 9AIM Design of Asynchronous Synchronous Up-Down counters with minimum number of gates and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

DESIGN OF SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER

TRUTH TABLEQ3 Q2 Q1 Q0 Q3

+ Q2+ Q1

+ Q0+

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 1 0 0 1 00 0 1 0 0 0 1 10 0 1 1 0 1 0 00 1 0 0 0 1 0 10 1 0 1 0 1 1 00 1 1 0 0 1 1 10 1 1 1 1 0 0 01 0 0 0 1 0 0 11 0 0 1 1 0 1 01 0 1 0 1 0 1 11 0 1 1 1 1 0 01 1 0 0 1 1 0 11 1 0 1 1 1 1 01 1 1 0 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

Now using the karnaugh map we find the simplified expressions for Q3+ Q2

+ Q1+ Q0

+

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 30 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

PROCEDURE

1) In the first step for building the circuit for a synchronous counter design a D-FF using NAND2 NAND3 gates as shown below using component instantiation (create the cell name and port name same as in the morbon20(in L-edit))

2) Update the symbol

3) Add the DFF cell(symbol) in the library Instantiate DFF to build the Asynchronous counter Same way build the circuit for Synchronous counter along with required gates as per the above design

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 31 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Asynchronous Counter

Synchronous Counter

4) Check the working of the both COUNTERs and verify the truth table as per the usual procedure of T-SPICE and W-EDIT

W-EDIT FILE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 32 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

5) Export the schematic and generate the layout by TPR

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 33 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 10

AIM Design SERIAL REGISTER capable of holding and shifting 4 bit words and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

Circuit

A Simple Shift Register Consisting of D-type Flip-flops

PROCEDURE

1) Use the same DFF used in counters

2) Circuit diagram

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 34 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

3) Export the schematic and generate the layout by TPR

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 35 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 12

AIM Design a barrel shifter using nMOSFETs and draw the schematic in schematic editor Verify the timing diagrams in schematic for shift right operation

TheoryA barrel shifter is a digital circuit that can shift a data word by a specified number of bits in one clock cycle It can be implemented as a sequence of multiplexers (mux) and in such an implementation the output of one mux is connected to the input of the next mux in a way that depends on the shift distance

For example take a 4-bit barrel shifter with inputs A B C and D The shifter can cycle the order of the bits ABCD as DABC CDAB or BCDA in this case no bits are lost That is it can shift all of the outputs up to three positions to the right (and thus make any cyclic combination of A B C and D) The barrel shifter has a variety of applications including being a vital component in microprocessors (alongside the ALU)

A common usage of a barrel shifter is in the hardware implementation of floating-point arithmetic For a floating-point add or subtract operation the significant of the two numbers must be aligned which requires shifting the smaller number to the right increasing its exponent until it matches the exponent of the larger number This is done by subtracting the exponents and using the barrel shifter to shift the smaller number to the right by the difference in one cycle If a simple shifter were used shifting by n bit positions would require n clock cycles

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 36 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 37 37 Mr Ravikant G B

  • The Digital Inverter or NOT gate
  • PROCEDURE
  • XOR Gate
  • The exclusive-OR (XOR) operator uses the symbol oplus and it performs the following logic operation
  • X oplus Y = X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y
  • The result is 1 only when either X is equal to 1 or Y is equal to 1 but not when both X and Y are equal to 1
  • XNOR Gate
  • The exclusive-NOR (XNOR) operator uses the symbol 1048703 and it performs the following logic operation
  • X 1048703Y = X Y + Xrsquo Yrsquo = (X oplus Y)rsquo
  • The result is 1 when either both X and Y are 0rsquos or when both are 1rsquos That is why this gate is often referred to as the Equivalence gate
  • The truth tables clearly show that the exclusive-NOR operation is the complement of the exclusive-OR
  • This can also be shown by algebraic manipulation as follows
  • (X oplus Y)rsquo = (X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y)rsquo
  • = (X Yrsquo)rsquo (Xrsquo Y)rsquo = (Xrsquo + Y) (X + Yrsquo)
  • = (XY + XrsquoYrsquo)
Page 27: vlsi manual

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 7

AIM Design Serial and paralle adder and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

Circuit Diagram

ProcedureSame as in experiment 5

S-EDIT FILE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 27 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Generated Layout for the above circuit

Note Similar procedure is followed for the construction of parallel AdderThe schematic of parallel adder is as given below

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 28 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 8AIM Design 41 Mux and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematicImplement using universal gatesProcedureFollow the steps as in experiment 5S-Edit

Generated layout for the above circuit

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 29 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 9AIM Design of Asynchronous Synchronous Up-Down counters with minimum number of gates and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

DESIGN OF SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER

TRUTH TABLEQ3 Q2 Q1 Q0 Q3

+ Q2+ Q1

+ Q0+

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 1 0 0 1 00 0 1 0 0 0 1 10 0 1 1 0 1 0 00 1 0 0 0 1 0 10 1 0 1 0 1 1 00 1 1 0 0 1 1 10 1 1 1 1 0 0 01 0 0 0 1 0 0 11 0 0 1 1 0 1 01 0 1 0 1 0 1 11 0 1 1 1 1 0 01 1 0 0 1 1 0 11 1 0 1 1 1 1 01 1 1 0 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

Now using the karnaugh map we find the simplified expressions for Q3+ Q2

+ Q1+ Q0

+

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 30 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

PROCEDURE

1) In the first step for building the circuit for a synchronous counter design a D-FF using NAND2 NAND3 gates as shown below using component instantiation (create the cell name and port name same as in the morbon20(in L-edit))

2) Update the symbol

3) Add the DFF cell(symbol) in the library Instantiate DFF to build the Asynchronous counter Same way build the circuit for Synchronous counter along with required gates as per the above design

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 31 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Asynchronous Counter

Synchronous Counter

4) Check the working of the both COUNTERs and verify the truth table as per the usual procedure of T-SPICE and W-EDIT

W-EDIT FILE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 32 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

5) Export the schematic and generate the layout by TPR

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 33 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 10

AIM Design SERIAL REGISTER capable of holding and shifting 4 bit words and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

Circuit

A Simple Shift Register Consisting of D-type Flip-flops

PROCEDURE

1) Use the same DFF used in counters

2) Circuit diagram

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 34 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

3) Export the schematic and generate the layout by TPR

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 35 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 12

AIM Design a barrel shifter using nMOSFETs and draw the schematic in schematic editor Verify the timing diagrams in schematic for shift right operation

TheoryA barrel shifter is a digital circuit that can shift a data word by a specified number of bits in one clock cycle It can be implemented as a sequence of multiplexers (mux) and in such an implementation the output of one mux is connected to the input of the next mux in a way that depends on the shift distance

For example take a 4-bit barrel shifter with inputs A B C and D The shifter can cycle the order of the bits ABCD as DABC CDAB or BCDA in this case no bits are lost That is it can shift all of the outputs up to three positions to the right (and thus make any cyclic combination of A B C and D) The barrel shifter has a variety of applications including being a vital component in microprocessors (alongside the ALU)

A common usage of a barrel shifter is in the hardware implementation of floating-point arithmetic For a floating-point add or subtract operation the significant of the two numbers must be aligned which requires shifting the smaller number to the right increasing its exponent until it matches the exponent of the larger number This is done by subtracting the exponents and using the barrel shifter to shift the smaller number to the right by the difference in one cycle If a simple shifter were used shifting by n bit positions would require n clock cycles

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 36 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 37 37 Mr Ravikant G B

  • The Digital Inverter or NOT gate
  • PROCEDURE
  • XOR Gate
  • The exclusive-OR (XOR) operator uses the symbol oplus and it performs the following logic operation
  • X oplus Y = X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y
  • The result is 1 only when either X is equal to 1 or Y is equal to 1 but not when both X and Y are equal to 1
  • XNOR Gate
  • The exclusive-NOR (XNOR) operator uses the symbol 1048703 and it performs the following logic operation
  • X 1048703Y = X Y + Xrsquo Yrsquo = (X oplus Y)rsquo
  • The result is 1 when either both X and Y are 0rsquos or when both are 1rsquos That is why this gate is often referred to as the Equivalence gate
  • The truth tables clearly show that the exclusive-NOR operation is the complement of the exclusive-OR
  • This can also be shown by algebraic manipulation as follows
  • (X oplus Y)rsquo = (X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y)rsquo
  • = (X Yrsquo)rsquo (Xrsquo Y)rsquo = (Xrsquo + Y) (X + Yrsquo)
  • = (XY + XrsquoYrsquo)
Page 28: vlsi manual

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Generated Layout for the above circuit

Note Similar procedure is followed for the construction of parallel AdderThe schematic of parallel adder is as given below

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 28 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 8AIM Design 41 Mux and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematicImplement using universal gatesProcedureFollow the steps as in experiment 5S-Edit

Generated layout for the above circuit

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 29 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 9AIM Design of Asynchronous Synchronous Up-Down counters with minimum number of gates and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

DESIGN OF SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER

TRUTH TABLEQ3 Q2 Q1 Q0 Q3

+ Q2+ Q1

+ Q0+

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 1 0 0 1 00 0 1 0 0 0 1 10 0 1 1 0 1 0 00 1 0 0 0 1 0 10 1 0 1 0 1 1 00 1 1 0 0 1 1 10 1 1 1 1 0 0 01 0 0 0 1 0 0 11 0 0 1 1 0 1 01 0 1 0 1 0 1 11 0 1 1 1 1 0 01 1 0 0 1 1 0 11 1 0 1 1 1 1 01 1 1 0 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

Now using the karnaugh map we find the simplified expressions for Q3+ Q2

+ Q1+ Q0

+

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 30 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

PROCEDURE

1) In the first step for building the circuit for a synchronous counter design a D-FF using NAND2 NAND3 gates as shown below using component instantiation (create the cell name and port name same as in the morbon20(in L-edit))

2) Update the symbol

3) Add the DFF cell(symbol) in the library Instantiate DFF to build the Asynchronous counter Same way build the circuit for Synchronous counter along with required gates as per the above design

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 31 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Asynchronous Counter

Synchronous Counter

4) Check the working of the both COUNTERs and verify the truth table as per the usual procedure of T-SPICE and W-EDIT

W-EDIT FILE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 32 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

5) Export the schematic and generate the layout by TPR

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 33 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 10

AIM Design SERIAL REGISTER capable of holding and shifting 4 bit words and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

Circuit

A Simple Shift Register Consisting of D-type Flip-flops

PROCEDURE

1) Use the same DFF used in counters

2) Circuit diagram

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 34 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

3) Export the schematic and generate the layout by TPR

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 35 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 12

AIM Design a barrel shifter using nMOSFETs and draw the schematic in schematic editor Verify the timing diagrams in schematic for shift right operation

TheoryA barrel shifter is a digital circuit that can shift a data word by a specified number of bits in one clock cycle It can be implemented as a sequence of multiplexers (mux) and in such an implementation the output of one mux is connected to the input of the next mux in a way that depends on the shift distance

For example take a 4-bit barrel shifter with inputs A B C and D The shifter can cycle the order of the bits ABCD as DABC CDAB or BCDA in this case no bits are lost That is it can shift all of the outputs up to three positions to the right (and thus make any cyclic combination of A B C and D) The barrel shifter has a variety of applications including being a vital component in microprocessors (alongside the ALU)

A common usage of a barrel shifter is in the hardware implementation of floating-point arithmetic For a floating-point add or subtract operation the significant of the two numbers must be aligned which requires shifting the smaller number to the right increasing its exponent until it matches the exponent of the larger number This is done by subtracting the exponents and using the barrel shifter to shift the smaller number to the right by the difference in one cycle If a simple shifter were used shifting by n bit positions would require n clock cycles

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 36 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 37 37 Mr Ravikant G B

  • The Digital Inverter or NOT gate
  • PROCEDURE
  • XOR Gate
  • The exclusive-OR (XOR) operator uses the symbol oplus and it performs the following logic operation
  • X oplus Y = X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y
  • The result is 1 only when either X is equal to 1 or Y is equal to 1 but not when both X and Y are equal to 1
  • XNOR Gate
  • The exclusive-NOR (XNOR) operator uses the symbol 1048703 and it performs the following logic operation
  • X 1048703Y = X Y + Xrsquo Yrsquo = (X oplus Y)rsquo
  • The result is 1 when either both X and Y are 0rsquos or when both are 1rsquos That is why this gate is often referred to as the Equivalence gate
  • The truth tables clearly show that the exclusive-NOR operation is the complement of the exclusive-OR
  • This can also be shown by algebraic manipulation as follows
  • (X oplus Y)rsquo = (X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y)rsquo
  • = (X Yrsquo)rsquo (Xrsquo Y)rsquo = (Xrsquo + Y) (X + Yrsquo)
  • = (XY + XrsquoYrsquo)
Page 29: vlsi manual

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 8AIM Design 41 Mux and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematicImplement using universal gatesProcedureFollow the steps as in experiment 5S-Edit

Generated layout for the above circuit

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 29 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 9AIM Design of Asynchronous Synchronous Up-Down counters with minimum number of gates and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

DESIGN OF SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER

TRUTH TABLEQ3 Q2 Q1 Q0 Q3

+ Q2+ Q1

+ Q0+

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 1 0 0 1 00 0 1 0 0 0 1 10 0 1 1 0 1 0 00 1 0 0 0 1 0 10 1 0 1 0 1 1 00 1 1 0 0 1 1 10 1 1 1 1 0 0 01 0 0 0 1 0 0 11 0 0 1 1 0 1 01 0 1 0 1 0 1 11 0 1 1 1 1 0 01 1 0 0 1 1 0 11 1 0 1 1 1 1 01 1 1 0 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

Now using the karnaugh map we find the simplified expressions for Q3+ Q2

+ Q1+ Q0

+

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 30 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

PROCEDURE

1) In the first step for building the circuit for a synchronous counter design a D-FF using NAND2 NAND3 gates as shown below using component instantiation (create the cell name and port name same as in the morbon20(in L-edit))

2) Update the symbol

3) Add the DFF cell(symbol) in the library Instantiate DFF to build the Asynchronous counter Same way build the circuit for Synchronous counter along with required gates as per the above design

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 31 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Asynchronous Counter

Synchronous Counter

4) Check the working of the both COUNTERs and verify the truth table as per the usual procedure of T-SPICE and W-EDIT

W-EDIT FILE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 32 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

5) Export the schematic and generate the layout by TPR

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 33 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 10

AIM Design SERIAL REGISTER capable of holding and shifting 4 bit words and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

Circuit

A Simple Shift Register Consisting of D-type Flip-flops

PROCEDURE

1) Use the same DFF used in counters

2) Circuit diagram

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 34 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

3) Export the schematic and generate the layout by TPR

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 35 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 12

AIM Design a barrel shifter using nMOSFETs and draw the schematic in schematic editor Verify the timing diagrams in schematic for shift right operation

TheoryA barrel shifter is a digital circuit that can shift a data word by a specified number of bits in one clock cycle It can be implemented as a sequence of multiplexers (mux) and in such an implementation the output of one mux is connected to the input of the next mux in a way that depends on the shift distance

For example take a 4-bit barrel shifter with inputs A B C and D The shifter can cycle the order of the bits ABCD as DABC CDAB or BCDA in this case no bits are lost That is it can shift all of the outputs up to three positions to the right (and thus make any cyclic combination of A B C and D) The barrel shifter has a variety of applications including being a vital component in microprocessors (alongside the ALU)

A common usage of a barrel shifter is in the hardware implementation of floating-point arithmetic For a floating-point add or subtract operation the significant of the two numbers must be aligned which requires shifting the smaller number to the right increasing its exponent until it matches the exponent of the larger number This is done by subtracting the exponents and using the barrel shifter to shift the smaller number to the right by the difference in one cycle If a simple shifter were used shifting by n bit positions would require n clock cycles

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 36 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 37 37 Mr Ravikant G B

  • The Digital Inverter or NOT gate
  • PROCEDURE
  • XOR Gate
  • The exclusive-OR (XOR) operator uses the symbol oplus and it performs the following logic operation
  • X oplus Y = X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y
  • The result is 1 only when either X is equal to 1 or Y is equal to 1 but not when both X and Y are equal to 1
  • XNOR Gate
  • The exclusive-NOR (XNOR) operator uses the symbol 1048703 and it performs the following logic operation
  • X 1048703Y = X Y + Xrsquo Yrsquo = (X oplus Y)rsquo
  • The result is 1 when either both X and Y are 0rsquos or when both are 1rsquos That is why this gate is often referred to as the Equivalence gate
  • The truth tables clearly show that the exclusive-NOR operation is the complement of the exclusive-OR
  • This can also be shown by algebraic manipulation as follows
  • (X oplus Y)rsquo = (X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y)rsquo
  • = (X Yrsquo)rsquo (Xrsquo Y)rsquo = (Xrsquo + Y) (X + Yrsquo)
  • = (XY + XrsquoYrsquo)
Page 30: vlsi manual

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 9AIM Design of Asynchronous Synchronous Up-Down counters with minimum number of gates and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

DESIGN OF SYNCHRONOUS COUNTER

TRUTH TABLEQ3 Q2 Q1 Q0 Q3

+ Q2+ Q1

+ Q0+

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 1 0 0 1 00 0 1 0 0 0 1 10 0 1 1 0 1 0 00 1 0 0 0 1 0 10 1 0 1 0 1 1 00 1 1 0 0 1 1 10 1 1 1 1 0 0 01 0 0 0 1 0 0 11 0 0 1 1 0 1 01 0 1 0 1 0 1 11 0 1 1 1 1 0 01 1 0 0 1 1 0 11 1 0 1 1 1 1 01 1 1 0 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

Now using the karnaugh map we find the simplified expressions for Q3+ Q2

+ Q1+ Q0

+

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 30 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

PROCEDURE

1) In the first step for building the circuit for a synchronous counter design a D-FF using NAND2 NAND3 gates as shown below using component instantiation (create the cell name and port name same as in the morbon20(in L-edit))

2) Update the symbol

3) Add the DFF cell(symbol) in the library Instantiate DFF to build the Asynchronous counter Same way build the circuit for Synchronous counter along with required gates as per the above design

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 31 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Asynchronous Counter

Synchronous Counter

4) Check the working of the both COUNTERs and verify the truth table as per the usual procedure of T-SPICE and W-EDIT

W-EDIT FILE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 32 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

5) Export the schematic and generate the layout by TPR

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 33 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 10

AIM Design SERIAL REGISTER capable of holding and shifting 4 bit words and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

Circuit

A Simple Shift Register Consisting of D-type Flip-flops

PROCEDURE

1) Use the same DFF used in counters

2) Circuit diagram

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 34 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

3) Export the schematic and generate the layout by TPR

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 35 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 12

AIM Design a barrel shifter using nMOSFETs and draw the schematic in schematic editor Verify the timing diagrams in schematic for shift right operation

TheoryA barrel shifter is a digital circuit that can shift a data word by a specified number of bits in one clock cycle It can be implemented as a sequence of multiplexers (mux) and in such an implementation the output of one mux is connected to the input of the next mux in a way that depends on the shift distance

For example take a 4-bit barrel shifter with inputs A B C and D The shifter can cycle the order of the bits ABCD as DABC CDAB or BCDA in this case no bits are lost That is it can shift all of the outputs up to three positions to the right (and thus make any cyclic combination of A B C and D) The barrel shifter has a variety of applications including being a vital component in microprocessors (alongside the ALU)

A common usage of a barrel shifter is in the hardware implementation of floating-point arithmetic For a floating-point add or subtract operation the significant of the two numbers must be aligned which requires shifting the smaller number to the right increasing its exponent until it matches the exponent of the larger number This is done by subtracting the exponents and using the barrel shifter to shift the smaller number to the right by the difference in one cycle If a simple shifter were used shifting by n bit positions would require n clock cycles

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 36 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 37 37 Mr Ravikant G B

  • The Digital Inverter or NOT gate
  • PROCEDURE
  • XOR Gate
  • The exclusive-OR (XOR) operator uses the symbol oplus and it performs the following logic operation
  • X oplus Y = X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y
  • The result is 1 only when either X is equal to 1 or Y is equal to 1 but not when both X and Y are equal to 1
  • XNOR Gate
  • The exclusive-NOR (XNOR) operator uses the symbol 1048703 and it performs the following logic operation
  • X 1048703Y = X Y + Xrsquo Yrsquo = (X oplus Y)rsquo
  • The result is 1 when either both X and Y are 0rsquos or when both are 1rsquos That is why this gate is often referred to as the Equivalence gate
  • The truth tables clearly show that the exclusive-NOR operation is the complement of the exclusive-OR
  • This can also be shown by algebraic manipulation as follows
  • (X oplus Y)rsquo = (X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y)rsquo
  • = (X Yrsquo)rsquo (Xrsquo Y)rsquo = (Xrsquo + Y) (X + Yrsquo)
  • = (XY + XrsquoYrsquo)
Page 31: vlsi manual

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

PROCEDURE

1) In the first step for building the circuit for a synchronous counter design a D-FF using NAND2 NAND3 gates as shown below using component instantiation (create the cell name and port name same as in the morbon20(in L-edit))

2) Update the symbol

3) Add the DFF cell(symbol) in the library Instantiate DFF to build the Asynchronous counter Same way build the circuit for Synchronous counter along with required gates as per the above design

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 31 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Asynchronous Counter

Synchronous Counter

4) Check the working of the both COUNTERs and verify the truth table as per the usual procedure of T-SPICE and W-EDIT

W-EDIT FILE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 32 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

5) Export the schematic and generate the layout by TPR

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 33 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 10

AIM Design SERIAL REGISTER capable of holding and shifting 4 bit words and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

Circuit

A Simple Shift Register Consisting of D-type Flip-flops

PROCEDURE

1) Use the same DFF used in counters

2) Circuit diagram

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 34 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

3) Export the schematic and generate the layout by TPR

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 35 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 12

AIM Design a barrel shifter using nMOSFETs and draw the schematic in schematic editor Verify the timing diagrams in schematic for shift right operation

TheoryA barrel shifter is a digital circuit that can shift a data word by a specified number of bits in one clock cycle It can be implemented as a sequence of multiplexers (mux) and in such an implementation the output of one mux is connected to the input of the next mux in a way that depends on the shift distance

For example take a 4-bit barrel shifter with inputs A B C and D The shifter can cycle the order of the bits ABCD as DABC CDAB or BCDA in this case no bits are lost That is it can shift all of the outputs up to three positions to the right (and thus make any cyclic combination of A B C and D) The barrel shifter has a variety of applications including being a vital component in microprocessors (alongside the ALU)

A common usage of a barrel shifter is in the hardware implementation of floating-point arithmetic For a floating-point add or subtract operation the significant of the two numbers must be aligned which requires shifting the smaller number to the right increasing its exponent until it matches the exponent of the larger number This is done by subtracting the exponents and using the barrel shifter to shift the smaller number to the right by the difference in one cycle If a simple shifter were used shifting by n bit positions would require n clock cycles

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 36 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 37 37 Mr Ravikant G B

  • The Digital Inverter or NOT gate
  • PROCEDURE
  • XOR Gate
  • The exclusive-OR (XOR) operator uses the symbol oplus and it performs the following logic operation
  • X oplus Y = X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y
  • The result is 1 only when either X is equal to 1 or Y is equal to 1 but not when both X and Y are equal to 1
  • XNOR Gate
  • The exclusive-NOR (XNOR) operator uses the symbol 1048703 and it performs the following logic operation
  • X 1048703Y = X Y + Xrsquo Yrsquo = (X oplus Y)rsquo
  • The result is 1 when either both X and Y are 0rsquos or when both are 1rsquos That is why this gate is often referred to as the Equivalence gate
  • The truth tables clearly show that the exclusive-NOR operation is the complement of the exclusive-OR
  • This can also be shown by algebraic manipulation as follows
  • (X oplus Y)rsquo = (X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y)rsquo
  • = (X Yrsquo)rsquo (Xrsquo Y)rsquo = (Xrsquo + Y) (X + Yrsquo)
  • = (XY + XrsquoYrsquo)
Page 32: vlsi manual

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Asynchronous Counter

Synchronous Counter

4) Check the working of the both COUNTERs and verify the truth table as per the usual procedure of T-SPICE and W-EDIT

W-EDIT FILE

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 32 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

5) Export the schematic and generate the layout by TPR

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 33 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 10

AIM Design SERIAL REGISTER capable of holding and shifting 4 bit words and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

Circuit

A Simple Shift Register Consisting of D-type Flip-flops

PROCEDURE

1) Use the same DFF used in counters

2) Circuit diagram

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 34 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

3) Export the schematic and generate the layout by TPR

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 35 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 12

AIM Design a barrel shifter using nMOSFETs and draw the schematic in schematic editor Verify the timing diagrams in schematic for shift right operation

TheoryA barrel shifter is a digital circuit that can shift a data word by a specified number of bits in one clock cycle It can be implemented as a sequence of multiplexers (mux) and in such an implementation the output of one mux is connected to the input of the next mux in a way that depends on the shift distance

For example take a 4-bit barrel shifter with inputs A B C and D The shifter can cycle the order of the bits ABCD as DABC CDAB or BCDA in this case no bits are lost That is it can shift all of the outputs up to three positions to the right (and thus make any cyclic combination of A B C and D) The barrel shifter has a variety of applications including being a vital component in microprocessors (alongside the ALU)

A common usage of a barrel shifter is in the hardware implementation of floating-point arithmetic For a floating-point add or subtract operation the significant of the two numbers must be aligned which requires shifting the smaller number to the right increasing its exponent until it matches the exponent of the larger number This is done by subtracting the exponents and using the barrel shifter to shift the smaller number to the right by the difference in one cycle If a simple shifter were used shifting by n bit positions would require n clock cycles

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 36 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 37 37 Mr Ravikant G B

  • The Digital Inverter or NOT gate
  • PROCEDURE
  • XOR Gate
  • The exclusive-OR (XOR) operator uses the symbol oplus and it performs the following logic operation
  • X oplus Y = X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y
  • The result is 1 only when either X is equal to 1 or Y is equal to 1 but not when both X and Y are equal to 1
  • XNOR Gate
  • The exclusive-NOR (XNOR) operator uses the symbol 1048703 and it performs the following logic operation
  • X 1048703Y = X Y + Xrsquo Yrsquo = (X oplus Y)rsquo
  • The result is 1 when either both X and Y are 0rsquos or when both are 1rsquos That is why this gate is often referred to as the Equivalence gate
  • The truth tables clearly show that the exclusive-NOR operation is the complement of the exclusive-OR
  • This can also be shown by algebraic manipulation as follows
  • (X oplus Y)rsquo = (X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y)rsquo
  • = (X Yrsquo)rsquo (Xrsquo Y)rsquo = (Xrsquo + Y) (X + Yrsquo)
  • = (XY + XrsquoYrsquo)
Page 33: vlsi manual

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

5) Export the schematic and generate the layout by TPR

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 33 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 10

AIM Design SERIAL REGISTER capable of holding and shifting 4 bit words and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

Circuit

A Simple Shift Register Consisting of D-type Flip-flops

PROCEDURE

1) Use the same DFF used in counters

2) Circuit diagram

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 34 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

3) Export the schematic and generate the layout by TPR

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 35 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 12

AIM Design a barrel shifter using nMOSFETs and draw the schematic in schematic editor Verify the timing diagrams in schematic for shift right operation

TheoryA barrel shifter is a digital circuit that can shift a data word by a specified number of bits in one clock cycle It can be implemented as a sequence of multiplexers (mux) and in such an implementation the output of one mux is connected to the input of the next mux in a way that depends on the shift distance

For example take a 4-bit barrel shifter with inputs A B C and D The shifter can cycle the order of the bits ABCD as DABC CDAB or BCDA in this case no bits are lost That is it can shift all of the outputs up to three positions to the right (and thus make any cyclic combination of A B C and D) The barrel shifter has a variety of applications including being a vital component in microprocessors (alongside the ALU)

A common usage of a barrel shifter is in the hardware implementation of floating-point arithmetic For a floating-point add or subtract operation the significant of the two numbers must be aligned which requires shifting the smaller number to the right increasing its exponent until it matches the exponent of the larger number This is done by subtracting the exponents and using the barrel shifter to shift the smaller number to the right by the difference in one cycle If a simple shifter were used shifting by n bit positions would require n clock cycles

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 36 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 37 37 Mr Ravikant G B

  • The Digital Inverter or NOT gate
  • PROCEDURE
  • XOR Gate
  • The exclusive-OR (XOR) operator uses the symbol oplus and it performs the following logic operation
  • X oplus Y = X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y
  • The result is 1 only when either X is equal to 1 or Y is equal to 1 but not when both X and Y are equal to 1
  • XNOR Gate
  • The exclusive-NOR (XNOR) operator uses the symbol 1048703 and it performs the following logic operation
  • X 1048703Y = X Y + Xrsquo Yrsquo = (X oplus Y)rsquo
  • The result is 1 when either both X and Y are 0rsquos or when both are 1rsquos That is why this gate is often referred to as the Equivalence gate
  • The truth tables clearly show that the exclusive-NOR operation is the complement of the exclusive-OR
  • This can also be shown by algebraic manipulation as follows
  • (X oplus Y)rsquo = (X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y)rsquo
  • = (X Yrsquo)rsquo (Xrsquo Y)rsquo = (Xrsquo + Y) (X + Yrsquo)
  • = (XY + XrsquoYrsquo)
Page 34: vlsi manual

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 10

AIM Design SERIAL REGISTER capable of holding and shifting 4 bit words and draw the schematic using component instantiation in schematic editor and for the same generate the layout using Place and route Verify the timing diagrams in schematic

Circuit

A Simple Shift Register Consisting of D-type Flip-flops

PROCEDURE

1) Use the same DFF used in counters

2) Circuit diagram

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 34 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

3) Export the schematic and generate the layout by TPR

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 35 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 12

AIM Design a barrel shifter using nMOSFETs and draw the schematic in schematic editor Verify the timing diagrams in schematic for shift right operation

TheoryA barrel shifter is a digital circuit that can shift a data word by a specified number of bits in one clock cycle It can be implemented as a sequence of multiplexers (mux) and in such an implementation the output of one mux is connected to the input of the next mux in a way that depends on the shift distance

For example take a 4-bit barrel shifter with inputs A B C and D The shifter can cycle the order of the bits ABCD as DABC CDAB or BCDA in this case no bits are lost That is it can shift all of the outputs up to three positions to the right (and thus make any cyclic combination of A B C and D) The barrel shifter has a variety of applications including being a vital component in microprocessors (alongside the ALU)

A common usage of a barrel shifter is in the hardware implementation of floating-point arithmetic For a floating-point add or subtract operation the significant of the two numbers must be aligned which requires shifting the smaller number to the right increasing its exponent until it matches the exponent of the larger number This is done by subtracting the exponents and using the barrel shifter to shift the smaller number to the right by the difference in one cycle If a simple shifter were used shifting by n bit positions would require n clock cycles

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 36 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 37 37 Mr Ravikant G B

  • The Digital Inverter or NOT gate
  • PROCEDURE
  • XOR Gate
  • The exclusive-OR (XOR) operator uses the symbol oplus and it performs the following logic operation
  • X oplus Y = X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y
  • The result is 1 only when either X is equal to 1 or Y is equal to 1 but not when both X and Y are equal to 1
  • XNOR Gate
  • The exclusive-NOR (XNOR) operator uses the symbol 1048703 and it performs the following logic operation
  • X 1048703Y = X Y + Xrsquo Yrsquo = (X oplus Y)rsquo
  • The result is 1 when either both X and Y are 0rsquos or when both are 1rsquos That is why this gate is often referred to as the Equivalence gate
  • The truth tables clearly show that the exclusive-NOR operation is the complement of the exclusive-OR
  • This can also be shown by algebraic manipulation as follows
  • (X oplus Y)rsquo = (X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y)rsquo
  • = (X Yrsquo)rsquo (Xrsquo Y)rsquo = (Xrsquo + Y) (X + Yrsquo)
  • = (XY + XrsquoYrsquo)
Page 35: vlsi manual

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

3) Export the schematic and generate the layout by TPR

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 35 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 12

AIM Design a barrel shifter using nMOSFETs and draw the schematic in schematic editor Verify the timing diagrams in schematic for shift right operation

TheoryA barrel shifter is a digital circuit that can shift a data word by a specified number of bits in one clock cycle It can be implemented as a sequence of multiplexers (mux) and in such an implementation the output of one mux is connected to the input of the next mux in a way that depends on the shift distance

For example take a 4-bit barrel shifter with inputs A B C and D The shifter can cycle the order of the bits ABCD as DABC CDAB or BCDA in this case no bits are lost That is it can shift all of the outputs up to three positions to the right (and thus make any cyclic combination of A B C and D) The barrel shifter has a variety of applications including being a vital component in microprocessors (alongside the ALU)

A common usage of a barrel shifter is in the hardware implementation of floating-point arithmetic For a floating-point add or subtract operation the significant of the two numbers must be aligned which requires shifting the smaller number to the right increasing its exponent until it matches the exponent of the larger number This is done by subtracting the exponents and using the barrel shifter to shift the smaller number to the right by the difference in one cycle If a simple shifter were used shifting by n bit positions would require n clock cycles

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 36 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 37 37 Mr Ravikant G B

  • The Digital Inverter or NOT gate
  • PROCEDURE
  • XOR Gate
  • The exclusive-OR (XOR) operator uses the symbol oplus and it performs the following logic operation
  • X oplus Y = X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y
  • The result is 1 only when either X is equal to 1 or Y is equal to 1 but not when both X and Y are equal to 1
  • XNOR Gate
  • The exclusive-NOR (XNOR) operator uses the symbol 1048703 and it performs the following logic operation
  • X 1048703Y = X Y + Xrsquo Yrsquo = (X oplus Y)rsquo
  • The result is 1 when either both X and Y are 0rsquos or when both are 1rsquos That is why this gate is often referred to as the Equivalence gate
  • The truth tables clearly show that the exclusive-NOR operation is the complement of the exclusive-OR
  • This can also be shown by algebraic manipulation as follows
  • (X oplus Y)rsquo = (X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y)rsquo
  • = (X Yrsquo)rsquo (Xrsquo Y)rsquo = (Xrsquo + Y) (X + Yrsquo)
  • = (XY + XrsquoYrsquo)
Page 36: vlsi manual

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Experiment 12

AIM Design a barrel shifter using nMOSFETs and draw the schematic in schematic editor Verify the timing diagrams in schematic for shift right operation

TheoryA barrel shifter is a digital circuit that can shift a data word by a specified number of bits in one clock cycle It can be implemented as a sequence of multiplexers (mux) and in such an implementation the output of one mux is connected to the input of the next mux in a way that depends on the shift distance

For example take a 4-bit barrel shifter with inputs A B C and D The shifter can cycle the order of the bits ABCD as DABC CDAB or BCDA in this case no bits are lost That is it can shift all of the outputs up to three positions to the right (and thus make any cyclic combination of A B C and D) The barrel shifter has a variety of applications including being a vital component in microprocessors (alongside the ALU)

A common usage of a barrel shifter is in the hardware implementation of floating-point arithmetic For a floating-point add or subtract operation the significant of the two numbers must be aligned which requires shifting the smaller number to the right increasing its exponent until it matches the exponent of the larger number This is done by subtracting the exponents and using the barrel shifter to shift the smaller number to the right by the difference in one cycle If a simple shifter were used shifting by n bit positions would require n clock cycles

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 36 37 Mr Ravikant G B

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 37 37 Mr Ravikant G B

  • The Digital Inverter or NOT gate
  • PROCEDURE
  • XOR Gate
  • The exclusive-OR (XOR) operator uses the symbol oplus and it performs the following logic operation
  • X oplus Y = X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y
  • The result is 1 only when either X is equal to 1 or Y is equal to 1 but not when both X and Y are equal to 1
  • XNOR Gate
  • The exclusive-NOR (XNOR) operator uses the symbol 1048703 and it performs the following logic operation
  • X 1048703Y = X Y + Xrsquo Yrsquo = (X oplus Y)rsquo
  • The result is 1 when either both X and Y are 0rsquos or when both are 1rsquos That is why this gate is often referred to as the Equivalence gate
  • The truth tables clearly show that the exclusive-NOR operation is the complement of the exclusive-OR
  • This can also be shown by algebraic manipulation as follows
  • (X oplus Y)rsquo = (X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y)rsquo
  • = (X Yrsquo)rsquo (Xrsquo Y)rsquo = (Xrsquo + Y) (X + Yrsquo)
  • = (XY + XrsquoYrsquo)
Page 37: vlsi manual

VLSI Lab Manual(Session Jan ndash May 2012)

Results

Marks

Signature of the Faculty

Faculty Incharge Mrs Rekha S S Page 37 37 Mr Ravikant G B

  • The Digital Inverter or NOT gate
  • PROCEDURE
  • XOR Gate
  • The exclusive-OR (XOR) operator uses the symbol oplus and it performs the following logic operation
  • X oplus Y = X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y
  • The result is 1 only when either X is equal to 1 or Y is equal to 1 but not when both X and Y are equal to 1
  • XNOR Gate
  • The exclusive-NOR (XNOR) operator uses the symbol 1048703 and it performs the following logic operation
  • X 1048703Y = X Y + Xrsquo Yrsquo = (X oplus Y)rsquo
  • The result is 1 when either both X and Y are 0rsquos or when both are 1rsquos That is why this gate is often referred to as the Equivalence gate
  • The truth tables clearly show that the exclusive-NOR operation is the complement of the exclusive-OR
  • This can also be shown by algebraic manipulation as follows
  • (X oplus Y)rsquo = (X Yrsquo + Xrsquo Y)rsquo
  • = (X Yrsquo)rsquo (Xrsquo Y)rsquo = (Xrsquo + Y) (X + Yrsquo)
  • = (XY + XrsquoYrsquo)

Recommended